Skip to main content

Full text of "Illinois state question book"

See other formats




t      F-  1 

f  llinote  State 


•.,,..,■..„.      .,,,.,,,.,,;,    jjijl^r    .•:Vx,rr^v;.;...,;: 


(Slueetion  Booft 


— oo — 


E.  B.  LEWIS,  PUBLISHER. 
LITCHFIELD,  ILL. 


Bookii5_Xi$ 


Copyright^ 


COPYRIGHT  DEPOSIT; 


LTBn63 


The  Illinois   State  Question  Book 

Questions  for  First,  Second  and  Third  Grade  Elementary 
Certificates. 

This  book  contains  the  questions  as  given  by  the  State  Ex- 
amining Board  tor  Second  and  Third  Grade  Elementary  Cer- 
tificates and  the  questions  in  the  common  branches  of  study 
used  in  the  examination  for  First  Grade  Elementary  Certif- 
icates. 


Copyright  applied  for,  February,  1915. 

All  rights  reserved 

Price,  Cloth  Bound,  75c. 

E.  B.  LEWIS,  Publisher,  Litchfield,  111. 


This  Book  Aims  to  Excell  All  Other  Question  Books  in  the 
Following  Points: 

1st.     In  the  Number,  Ability  and  Eminence  of  its  Authors. 

2nd.  In  the  Model  Forms  of  Written  Answers  Included. 
While  some  of  the  authors  have  abridged  their  answers  more 
than  they  would  be  in  an  examination,  many  others  have  an- 
swered the  topics  just  as  they  would  if  taking  the  examination 
themselves.  It  therefore  contains  model  forms,  which  feature 
alone  is  of  inestimable  value  to  any  young  teacher. 

3rd.  It  is  the  only  question  book  containing  the  examina- 
tions given  by  the  Illinois  State  Examining  Board  under  the 
New  Certificating  Law. 

4th.  It  gives  a  fair  idea  of  the  standard  of  work  required 
for  certificates  in  Illinois. 

5th.  Whole  topics  are  given  just  as  they  were  in  the  exam- 
inations, and  answered. 

6th.  The  old  ' '  Cramming, "  ' '  Pouring  In ' '  Process  of  Form- 
er Question  Books  has  been  eliminated.  No  attempt  has  been 
made  to  see  how  many  questions  could  be  manufactured  and 
advertised.  Most  any  topic  could  be  resolved  into  several 
single  questions. 


2  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

AUTHORS  WHO  HAVE  CONTRIBUTED  TO  THIS  VOLUME — 

MISS  HELEN  BRYDEN,  Assistant  in  English,  Southern  Illinois 
State  Normal  University — Reading. 

O.  C.  BAILEY,  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Effingham,  111. — Or- 
thography and  Penmanship. 

DAVID  FELMLEY,  President  Illinois  State  Normal  University — 
Arithmetic. 

H.  AMBROSE  PERRIN,  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Lincoln,  111. 
— Civics. 

H.  T.  WHITE,  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Carlinville,  111. — Phy- 
siology and  Reading. 

MISS  MYRTLE  GENTRY,  Instructor  in  Summer  School,  Illinois 
State  Normal  University  and  Teacher  in  Wichita,  Kan. — Grammar. 

ELBERT  WALLER,  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Albion,  111.,  and 
Author  of  Waller's  History  of  Illinois. — Illinois  History. 

ELMER  W.  CAVINS,  Teacher  of  Orthography  and  Penmanship, 
Illinois  State  Normal  University. — Orthography. 

GEORGE  H.  HOWE,  Professor  of  Mathematics,  Illinois  State 
Normal   University — Arithmetic. 

WILLIAM  HAWKES,  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Litchfield,  111. — 
Physiology. 

MISS  LAURA  HAYES,  Teacher  of  English  Grammar,  Illinois 
State  Normal  University — Grammar. 

EDGAR  S.  JONES,  Superintendent  East  Schools,  Taylorville,  111. 
— Geography. 

A.  F.  STROME,  Department  of  History,  Western  Illinois  State 
Normal  University — U.  S.  History. 

L.  P.  FROHARDT,  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Granite  City,  111. 
— Pedagogy. 

A.  S.  ANDERSON,  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Mt.  Carmel,  IU. — 
Elementary  Science. 

HERBERT  BASSETT,  Teacher  of  Geography  Western  Illinois 
State  Normal  School — Geography. 

ROY  M.  SALLEE,  Galesburg,  111.,  Formerly  Assistant  in  Biolcgy, 
Western  Illinois  State  Normal  School — Elementary  Science. 

CHARLES  McINTOSH,  Superintendent  Piatt  County  Schools  and 
Editor  of  Illinois  State  Course  of^  Study — State  Course  and  Penman- 
ship. 


MAR  27  1915 

©CI.A398115 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 


Section  One 


When  fourteen  topics  are  given  in  any  one  subject  the  rule 
is  that  applicants  writing  for  an  elementary  certificate  shall 
answer  questions  as  follows:  (1)  for  a  Third  Grade,  any  eight 
of  the  questions  from  f  to  10,  inclusive;  (2)  For  a  Second 
Grade,  any  eight  of  the  questions  from  3  to  12,  inclusive;  (3) 
For  a  First  Grade,  any  eight  of  the  questions  from  5  to  14,  in- 
clusive. 

READING — Questions. 


1.  The  slaves,  who  were  in  the  hold  of  the  vessel,  had  been  cap- 
tured in  Africa.  The  slaves  who  were  in  the  hold  of  the  vessel,  had 
been  captured  in  Atrica.  Read  the  above  sentence.  Pause  where 
the  commas  occur.  What  difference  in  meaning  is  there  in  the  first 
and  second? 

2.  So  every  bondman  in  his  own  hand  bears  the  power  to  cancel 
his  captivity?  What  would  the  meaning  be  if  the  first  seven  words 
are  read  in  one  group?  By  vertical  lines  mark  off  the  correct 
grouping. 

3.  In  what  grade  or  grades  would  the  following  classics  be  ap- 
propriate? Would  you  reject  any  as  unsuited  for  the  grades? 
Arabian  Nights,  Miles  Standish,  Hamlet,  The  Legend  of  Sleepy  Hol- 
low, Heynard  the  Fox,  Anderson's  Fairy  Tales,  Idylls  of  the  King, 
The  Tale  of  Two  Cities,  The  Man  Without  a  Country,  Robinson 
Crusoe,  Story  of  Ulysses. 

4.  We  have   a  secret,   just   we  three, 

The  robin  and  I  and  the  sweet  cherry  tree; 
The  bird  told  the  tree  and  the  tree  told  me, 
And  nobody  knows  it  but  just  we  three. 
But  of  course  the  robin  knows  it  best, 
Because  he  built  the — I  shan't  tell  the  rest; 
And  laid  the  four  little — somethings — in  it — 
I  am  afraid  I  shall  tell  it  every  minute. 
But  if  the  tree  and  the  robin  don't  peep, 
I'll  try  my  best  the  secret  to  keep; 
Tho  I  know  when  the  little  birds  fly  about, 
Then  the  whole  secret  will  be  out. — Anon. 


4  ILLINOIS  STATE   QUESTION  BOOK. 

In  what  grade  would  you  introduce  this  poem?  Make  out  a  les- 
son plan  showing  how  you  would  teach  it. 

5.  What  methods  would  you  use  in  disposing  of  unfamiliar 
^vords  which  the  pupil  meets  in  the  reading  iessoL  : 

fi.  Cassius — Do  not  presume  too  much  upon  my  love;  I  may  dr 
*hat  I  shall  be  sorry  for. 

rirutus — You  have  done  that  you  should  be  sorry  for.  Julius 
Caesar  IV:  3. 

What  is  the  meaning  when  emphasis  is  put  (a)  on  you?  (b)  or 
have?  (c)  on  should?  (d)  on  sorry?  (e)  on  done  and  should?  Ur- 
derline  the  words  which  should  be  emphasized. 

7.  Make  out  a  lesson  plan  for  teaching  "The  Little  Red  Hen" 
to  a  first  grade  class. 

8.  The  splendor  falls  on  castle  walls 

And  snowy  summits,  old  in  story; 
The  long  light  shakes  across  the  lakes, 

And  the  wild  cataract  leaps  in  glory. 
Blow,  bugle,  blow,  set  the  wild  echoes  flying; 
Blow,   bugle;    answer,  echoes,   dying,  dying,   dying. 

O,  hark!  O,  hear!  how  thin  and  clear, 

And  thinner,  clearer,  father  going! 
O,  sweet  and  far  from  cliff  and  scar, 

The  horns  of  Elfland,  faintly  blowing! 
Blow,  let  us  hear  the  purple  glens  replying; 
Blow,  bugle;  answer,  echoes,  dying,  dying,  dying. 

O,  love,  they  die  in  yon  rich  sky; 

They  faint  on  hill  or  field  or  river. 
Our  echoes  roll  from  soul  to  soul, 

And  grow  forever  and  forever. 
Blow,  bugle,  blow,  set  the  wild  echoes  flying; 
And  answer,  echoes,  answer,  dying,  dying,  dying. 

Why  does  the  writer  use  "splendor"  instead  of  "sun-set,"  and 
"summits"  instead  of  "mountains?"  What  is  meant  by  "old  in 
story?" 

9.  What  is  the  theme  of  the  above  poem?  In  order  to  make 
plain  the  theme  what  words  in  the  third  stanza  must  be  emphasized? 

10.  Explain  the  meaning  of  the  following:  "wild  echoes,"  "horns 
of  Elfland,"  "rich  sky,"  "purple  glens,"  "leaps  in  glory." 

11.  What  is  the  relation  of  phonics  to  reading?  Speak  of  the 
relative  place  of,  and  the  amount  of  time  to  be  given  to  reading 
and  literature  thru  the  grades. 

12.  Build  thee  more  stately  mansions,  O  my  soul, 

As  the  swift  seasons  roll; 

Leave  thy  low-vaulted  past! 
Let  each  new  temple,  nobler  than  the  last, 
Shut  thee  from  heaven  with  a  dome  more  vast, 

Till  thou  at  length  art  free, 
Leaving  thine  outgrown  shell  by  life's  unresting  sea! 

— Holmes. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  5 

Explain  the  meaning  of  the  following:  "Low-vaulted  past,"  "out- 
grown shell,"  "life's  unresting  sea."  How  does  the  soul  huild  man- 
sions?    What  is  meant  by  the  new  temple?" 

13.  In  "King  Lear,"  the  Fool  says:  "I  fain  would  learn  to  lie." 
What  does  this  sentence  mean  if  emphasis  is  put  (a)  on  I?  (b)  on 
fain?    (c)   on  learn?   (d)  on  lie? 

14.  Rip  van  Winkle;  The  Pied  Piper  of  Hamlin.  Select  one  of 
these  classics.  How  would  you  plan  to  teach  it  in  the  seventh  or 
eighth  grades?     In  answering  cover  the  following  points: 

A.  General  purpose  for  teacher  and  for  pupil. 

B.  Mode  of  approach. 

C.  Plan  of  procedure. 

D.  Amount  of  time  to  he  spent  in  oral  and  In  silent  reading. 


ARITHMETIC. — Questions. 

1.  Give  four  examples  in  the  substraction  of  integers,  arranged 
according  to  difficulty,  to  illustrate  some  difficulties  arising  in  sub- 
traction.   Tell  how  each  example  differs  from  the  preceding. 

2.  (a) 

1.1  1/9  +  .025  1/2  +  1/11=  what?    Give  exact  result, 
(b)  Simplify: 

2  2/11  2  1/2-15/6 

X   

3  3/4  4 

3.  The  circumference  of  a  circle  is  548.76  ft.  Find  the  diame- 
ter correct  to  .01  ft.  Use  PI  =  3.1 41 6.  Find  the  area  of  the  circle 
correct  to  .01  ft. 

4.  Develop  the  rule  for  "pointing  off"  in  the  multiplication  of 
decimal  fractions. 

5.  A  cube  whose  edge  is  six  inches  is  cut  into  two  equal  parts 
by  a  plane  passing  thru  diagonally  opposite  edges.  Find  the 
volume  and  whole  surface  of  one  of  the  equal  pieces. 

6.  Find  the  weight  in  kilograms  of  a  piece  of  iron  3  meters  long 
and  one  decimeter  square  at  the  end,  assuming  the  specific  gravity 
of  iron  to  be  7.2. 

7.  If  the  area  of  a  triangle  whose  base  is  40  ft.  is  600  sq.  ft, 
what  is  the  base  of  a  similar  triangle  whose  area  is  1200  sq.  ft.? 

8.  Find  the  proceeds  on  a  note  for  $800,  dated  Jan.  1,  1914,  due 
in  90  days,  not  bearing  interest,  and  discounted  at  the  bank  on 
January  27  at  7%. 

9.  After  being  allowed  discounts  of  10%  and  10%,  A  paid 
$82.60  for  a  bill  of  goods.     What  was  the  list  price? 

10.  Give  the  answers  to  the  following: 

(a)  1%  of  2.465=  what? 

(b)  16.5  =  200%   of  what  number? 

(c)  48.65=  what    per    cent   of    12.36?      Answer   correct 

to  .1%. 


6  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

11.  Give  the  form  of  solution  that  you  would  give  to  a  seventh 

grade  for  each  of  the  following  problems: 

(a)  7%    of  $850  =  what? 

(b)  |48  =  6%  of  what? 

(c)  32  =  5%   of  what  number? 

12.  Tell  which  of  the  following  statements  are  not  true,  and 
give  reasons: 

(a)  $24  +  50%  =  $48. 

(b)  28  cu.  in.H-7  in.  =  4  sq.  in. 

(c)  V900  »<*•  «.  =  30  ft. 

(d)  $2/3 -r  $3/5  =  $2/3  X  $3/5  =  $10/9. 

(e)  4  hr.  3  min.  2  sec.  X  15  =  60  hr.  45  mln.  30  sec. 

13.  Find  the  ratio  of: 

(a)  The  altitude  of  an  equilateral  triangle  to  its  side. 

(b)  the  diagonal  of  a  cube  to  its  edge. 

14.  Write  a  note  for  $8,000,  with  interest  at  5%,  dated  at 
Springfield,  Illinois,  Jan.  4,  1914,  due  in  two  years,  and  payable 
at  the  First  National  Bank  of  Springfield,  Illinois.  Make  John  Doe 
the  maker,  and  William  Roe  the  payee. 

This  note  is  first  endorsed  in  full  to  John  Jones,  and  then  in 
blank  by  John  Jones.     Write  both  endorsements. 

CIVICS — Questions. 

1.  What  is  the  purpose  of  government?  Where  is  the  source 
of  government  in  the  United  States? 

2.  What  distinction  is  there  between  a  town  and  township? 
What  offices  does  a  town  have?  Township?  Indicate  the  time 
of  election  of  each. 

3.  How  long  is  the  term  of  a  representative  in  Congress?  Of 
a  senator?  Of  the  President?  Of  a  judge  of  the  U.  S.  Supreme 
Court? 

4.  What  is  meant  by  civil  service?  By  diplomatic  service?  By 
consular  service? 

5.  Explain  writ  of  habeas  corpus,  bill  of  attainder,  appellate 
jurisdiction,  ex  post  facto  law,  indictment. 

6.  Explain  the  "town  system"  and  the  "county  system"  of 
county  government  in  Illinois. 

7.  Explain  how  the  minority  party  in  any  senatorial  district 
may  send  a  representative  to  the  general  assembly. 

8.  Who  may  be  excused  from  jury  service  in  Illinois?  Why 
this  provision  in  law? 

9.  What  arguments  for  and  against  an  electoral  system  of  elect- 
ing the  president? 

10.  State  fully  and  clearly  how  to  find  the  number  of  repre- 
sentatives for  each  state  in  congress  following  the  taking  of  the 
census. 

11.  What  is  the  most  important  committee  in  the  house  of 
representatives,  and  what  is  its  chief  duty? 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  7 

12.  Describe  the  ordinary  proceedings  in  the  passage  of  a  law 
in  Illinois. 

13.  How  may   fugitives   from  justice  be  returned  to   the  state 
in  which  the  crime  was  committeed? 

14.  What  is  meant  by  implied  powers  in  the  Federal  constitu- 
tion? Point  out  a  practical  application  of  this  power  in  our  history. 


STATE  COURSE  OF  STUDY — Questions. 

For  Third  Grade  Certificate  answer  any  eight  of  the  first  ten  ques- 
tions; for  Second  Grade  Certificate,  any  eight  of 
3   to   12,   inclusive. 


1.  What  subjects  should  be  taught  in  the  first  two  grades? 

2.  Discuss  the  value  of  a  school  library.  What  kinds  of  books 
should  it  contain? 

3.  What  are  the  four  aims  of  the  State  Course  of  Study? 

4.  Discuss  the  value  of  the  State  Course  to  the  rural  schools. 

5.  Explain  the  plan  of  alternation  of  studies  and  classes. 

6.  Make  out  a  suggestive  program  for  the  forenoon,  of  a  one- 
room  school,  or  of  a  grade  consisting  of  two  divisions. 

7.  Make  out  a  suggestive  program  for  the  afternoon,  of  a  one- 
room  school,  or  of  a  grade  consisting  of  two  divisions. 

8.  Name  and  discuss  brieiiy  from  three  to  five  purposes  served 
by  an  examination  system. 

How  may  the  disadvantages  of  an  examination  system  be  counter- 
acted in  part?  What  is  meant  by  Patron's  Day?  What  may  be 
accomplished  by  its  observance? 

9.  What  are  some  of  the  sources  of  material  for  reading  lessons 
in  the  lower  grades? 

10.  Give  five  general  suggestions  on  teaching  spelling. 

11.  What  aritmetic  work  should  be  taught  in  the  fifth  and 
sixth  grades? 

12.  Make  a  list  of  five  stories  suitable  for  second  grade  lan- 
guage work  and  outline  a  plan  for  teaching  one  of  them. 

What  aims  should  be  kept  in  mind  in  teaching  phonics?  Give 
a  plan  for  teaching  the  same. 


ORTHOGRAPHY — Questions. 

1.  Syllabicate  and  mark  the  accent:  ally,  cerebrum,  discourse, 
idea,  industry,  inquiry,   gondola,   horizon,  recess,   formidable. 

2.  In  each  of  the  following  works  mark  diacritically  the  first 
vowel  to  indicate  its  correct  pronunciation  in  the  word:  gratis,  deaf, 
arid,  piano,  water,  chasten,  produce  (noun),  forehead,  boquet. 


8  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

3.  Indicate  by  diacritical  markings  the  sound  of  e  in  whey,  meat, 
fern,  debt,  heir;   and  of  u  in  church,  human,  rule,  pull,  cup. 

4.  Give  the  meaning  of  the  prefix  in  each  of  the  following  words- 

(1)  antecedent  (6)  benevolent 

(2)  antonym  (7)  emigrate 

(3)  ancestor  (8)  offend 

(4)  preclude  (9)  impose 

(5)  seduce  (10)      immortal 

(Rewrite  the  prefixes  but  not  the  words;  number  the  prefixes  and 
their  meanings  to  correspond  with  the  numbers  of  the  words.) 

5.  (a)      Add  one  of  these  suffixes:  ed,  ing,  ence  or  ance  to  each 
of  the  following  words: 

begin  benefit 

abhor  merit 

stir  acquit 

confer  gallop 

heap  occur 

(b)      Give  a  rule  of  spelling  for  doubling  the     final     consonant 
when  a  suffix  is  added. 

6.  Give  the  meaning  of  the  root  in  each  of  the  following  words: 

(6)  normal 

(7)  recognize 

(8)  transgress 

(9)  deciduous 

(10)  fortitude 

(Do  not  rewrite  the  words;   number  the  meaning  to  correspond 
with  the  number  of  the  words.) 

7.  Give  as  complete  and   scholarly  definitions   as  you   can,  not 
merely  synonyms,  for  any  five  of  the  following  words: 

intercede  expire 

dissect  admonish 

bisect  contaminate 

persecute  circumvent 

List  of  words  to  be  spelled  for  First,  Second  and  Third  Grade  cer- 
tificates: 

1  changeable  14  committee 

2  conscience  15  legitimate 

3  develop  16  vegetation 

4  disappoint  17  cartilage 

5  forcible  18  injurious 

6  lullaby  19  geranium 

7  mortgage  20  bulletin 

8  perseverance  21  boquet 

9  privilege  22  inaugurate 

10  ridiculous  23  mischievous 

11  serviceable  24  tyranny 

12  similar  25  recommend 

13  predicament 


(1) 

intervene 

(2) 

nonplus 

(3) 

persecute 

(4) 

incredible 

(5) 

antidote 

ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 
PEDAGOGY — Questions. 


1.  Discuss  the  importance  of  the  first  day  at  school. 

2.  Discuss    the    importance    of    assignments    of    lessons.      What 
should  a  good  assignment  include? 

3.  What  may  a  teacher  properly  do  to  secure  regularity  of  at- 
tendance? 

4.  What  difference  does  it  make  how  children  sit,  or  stand,  or 
walk?        State  how  you  undertake  to  help  them  in  these  respects. 

5.  How  should  a  teacher  go  to  work  to  help  children  break  up 
bad  habits? 

6.  How    may    you    teach    children    to    memorize    so    as    to    save 
time  and  undue  effort? 

7.  What  ideas  have  you  to  guide  you  in  making  a  program? 

8.  Why  is  attention  so  important?       Under  what  conditions  can 
a  child  give  good  attention? 

9.  What  is   the  purpose   of   drills?        Describe   a   good   drill   in 
arithmetic. 

10.  Give    the    advantages    and    disadvantages    of    departmental 
teaching  in  the  grades  immediately  below  the  high  school. 

11.  Name  three   difficult  problems  of  high   school   management 
and  give  your  solution  for  them. 

12.  Discuss  discipline  in  the  upper  grades  compared  to  that  in 
the  high  school. 


ELEMENTARY  SCIENCE. — Questions. 

For   Second  Grade  Certificate  Only.      Answer  any   eight  questions. 


1.  Mention  three  different  methods  by  which  the  seeds  or  fruits 
of  plants  become  scattered,  and  give  illustrations  of  each  method. 

2.  Name  five  common  weeds  thai  arrow  in  cultivated  fields.     Men- 
tion some  qualities  that  fit  plants  :ve  in  cultivated  fields. 

3.  Name  five  serious  insect  pe    '   ^d  tell  what  measures  may 
be  taken  to  combat  each  of  them 

4.  Into   what  classes   may  our   common  birds   be   divided   with 
reference  to  the  time  of  year  that  th«y  spend  in  a  given  locality? 

5.  Name  three  different  varieties  of  corn  commonly  grown  in 
Illinois.     Discuss  briefly  the  selection  and  care  of  seed  corn. 

6.  Explain  why  the  air  rises  up  the  chimney  from  the  stove  or 


10  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

furnace.       Why  does  the  closing  of  the  dampers  of  a  stove  check 
the  burning  of  the  fire? 

7.  Mention  two  different  methods  by  which  certain  plants  are 
able  to  climb.  Point  out  both  the  advantages  and  the  disadvan- 
tages of  the  climbing  habit. 

8.  What  is  a  biennial  plant?  Name  three  biennial  plants  that 
are  commonly  raised  in  gardens. 

9.  What  facts  would  you  have  a  seventh  grade  class  note  and 
record  in  making  a  weather  record? 

10.  Explain  how  you  would  make  cuttings  of  such  plants  as 
the  geranium,  or  begonia.     How  are  sweet  potato  plants  propagated? 


PHYSIOLOGY. — Questions. 

1.  What  are  the  four  main  classes  of  foods?  Which  of  these 
is  indispensable  in  our  diet? 

2.  What  changes  does  most  of  our  food  have  to  undergo  be- 
fore it  can  enter  the  blood?  How  is  this  change  brought  about? 
What  do  we  call  the  process? 

3.  What  different  things  are  accomplished  by  the  circulation  of 
the  blood  thru  the  body? 

4.  How  does  air  that  is  exhaled  from  the  lungs  differ  in  content 
from  air  freshly  taken  into  the  lungs?  How  does  blood  that  leaves 
the  lungs  differ  in  content  from  blood  that  is  just  entering  the 
lungs? 

5.  Point  out  the  dangers  of  drinking  water  from  shallow  wells, 
also  those  arising  from  the  use  of  a  common  drinking  cup. 

6.  State  definitely  what  conditions  should  prevail  in  a  well 
heated  and  ventilated  room. 

7.  Discuss  the  importance  of  having  seats  and  desks  properly 
adjusted  as  to  height  for  school  children. 

8.  Discuss  the  value  of  regular  and  well  ehosen  exercise  in 
helping  to  keep  the  body  in  a  healthy  state. 

9.  Distinguish  between  secretion  and  excretion.  Name  the 
excretory  organs  of  the  body. 

10.  Name  some  of  the  conditions  that  are  favorable  for  the 
contraction  of  colds. 

11.  Name  five  common  bacterial  diseases  and  tell  how  each  is 
most  commonly  contracted. 

12.  Describe  briefly  the  nervous  mechanism  of  reflex  action. 

13.  Discuss  the  lighting  of  a  school  room. 

14.  What  should  be  done  with  the  patient  in  a  case  of  fainting? 
what  is  the  direct  cause  of  this  trouble? 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  11 

PENMANSHIP — Questions. 


For  Third  Grade  Certificate  answer  any  four  of  questions  1   to  5, 

inclusive;  for  Second  Grade,  any  four  of  questions  2  to  6; 

for  First  Grade,   any   four  of   questions   3    to    7. 


Penmanship  of  applicant  on  this  paper  will  count  fifty  per  cent. 


1.  What  in  general  should  be  the  position  of  body,  feet,  arms, 
and  paper  of  a  pupil  ready  to  begin  to  write? 

Give  directions  for  holding  the  pen. 

2.  In  making  out  the  program  for  a  rural  school  of  twenty 
pupils,  how  much  time  daily  would  you  assign  for  writing  in  the 
(a)  primary,  (b)  intermediate,  (c)  grammar  grades? 

3.  Why  are  young  children  usually  asked  to  write  with  pencils 
or  crayon  exercises  and  letters  much  larger  than  ordinary  script? 
Should  copy  books  be  used?       Give  reasons  for  your  answer. 

4.  Write  a  letter  of  application  for  the  position  you  expect  or 
desire  to  fill  during  the  coming  year. 

5.  To  show  your  conception  of  how  they  should  be  formed 
carefully  write: 

(a)  the  nine  digits, 

(b)  the  small  or  lower  case  letters, 

(c)  the  capital  letters. 

6.  The  principal  movements  used  in  writing  are  the  finger,  fore- 
arm, and  combined.       Describe  each. 

Which  movement  do  you  use  in  your  own  writing?  Which  would 
you  teach  (a)  to  primary  pupils,  (b)  to  intermediate  pupils,  (c)  to 
grammar  grade  pupils? 

7.  By  way  of  illustration,  give  specific  directions  concerning 
form  and  movement  for  the  practice  of  one  of  the  above  move- 
ments. 


GRAMMAR — Questions. 

1.  Discuss  the  most  important  differences  between  these  two 
groups  of  words:  (a)  "A  little  old  man  with  a  long  beard  hobbling 
to  meet  them."  (b)  "  A  little  old  nan  with  long  beard  hobbled 
to  meet  them." 

2.  Point  out  the  complete  subject  and  the  complete  predicate 
of  each  sentence: 


12  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

(a)  Who  are  you? 

(b)  If  there  be  any  virtue,  if  there  be  any  praise,  think 

on  these  things. 

(c)  All  legislative  powers  herein  granted  shall  be  vested 

in  a  Congress  of  the  United  States,  which  shall  con- 
sist of  a  Senate  and  a  House  of  Representatives. 

3.  a.  Give  the  rules  governing  the  formation  of  the  following 
plurals  and  possessives:  Cities',  knives,  feet,  writing-desks,  men- 
servants,  mouthfuls,  gentlemen  s,  brother-in-law's. 

b.  Write  the  plural  possessive  of:  lady,  house,  alumnus,  Miss 
Jones,  state. 

4.  Classify  the  following  sentences  as  simple,  complex,  com- 
pound or  compound-complex,  showing  why,  in  each  case: 

a.  Truly  there  is  a  tide  in  the  affairs  of  men,  but  there  is  no 

Gulf  Stream  setting  iorever  in  one  direction. 

b.  Hearing  his  imperial  name, 

Coupled  with  those  words  of  malice, 
Half  in  anger,  half  in  shame, 
Forth  the  great  campaigner  came 

Slowly  from  his  canvas  palace. 

c.  Not  a  drum  was  heard,  not  a  funeral  note, 

As   his   corpse   to   the  ramparts   we  hurried; 
Not  a  soldier  discharged  his  farewell  shot 
O'er  the  grave  where  our  hero  lies  buried. 

5.  Explain  what  is  meant  by  grammatical  person,  and  by  a 
personal  pronoun;  and  give  the  declension  of  the  personal  pronoun 
of  the  third  person. 

6.  Name  and  illustrate  four  uses  of  noun  clauses. 

7.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs  lie  and  lay,  and  a 
synopsis  in  the  indicative  mode  of 

(a)  the  verb  lie  in  the  third  person,  singular. 

(b)  the  verb  lay  in  the  first  person,  plural. 

8.  Discuss  one  of  the  following  topics: 

(a)  What  are  the  specific  applications  of  grammar  to  com- 
position work  in  matters  of  punctuation? 

(b)  Analysis  versus  parsing. 

9.  Name  the  most  important  uses  of  the  objective  case;  and 
choose  the  right  form  to  fill  these  blanks,  explaining  your  choice: 

a.  Who  made  the  noise?     Only  (I,  me). 

b.  This  is  the  student  wall  are  praising.   (Who,  whom.) 

c.     is  that  for?      (Who,  whom.) 

d.  We  thought  it  was (He,  him.) 

e boys  are  going  to  the  ball  game.  (We,  us.) 

10.  Classify  the  following  verbs  or  verb  phrases  and  tell  whether 
each  verb  or  verbal  belongs  to  the  old  or  new  conjugation  (weak 
or  strong): 

a.  We  have  heard  the  news. 

b.  The  days  are  growing  colder. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  13 

c.  We  should  observe  keenly. 

d.  There  lay  the  lost  pocket-book. 

e.  Set  the  table  quickly. 

11.  Parse  the  words  In  black  face: 

One  morning,  very  early,  before  the  sun  was  up,  I  rose  and 
found  the  shining  dew  on  every  buttercup. 

12.  Plan  one  of  the  following  lessons: 

a.  The  first  lesson  on  transitive  verbs. 

b.  A  review  and  drill  lesson  on  the  three  kinds  of  clauses. 

c.  The  classification  of  nouns  as  common  and  proper. 

13.  Discuss  voice  in  English,  under  these  heads: 
a.     What  kinds  of  verbs  have  a  passive  voice? 

b.     How  are  passive  verb  phrases  formed? 

c.  What  other  shifts  in  construction  does  a  change  of  voice  ne- 

cessitate? 

d.  What  are  the  proper  uses  and  what  some  abuses  of  the 

passive? 

14.  Tell  under  what  circumstances  the  following  clause  would 
be  limiting,  and  under  what  circumstances  it  would  be  purely  de- 
scriptive; and  punctuate  the  sentence  to  make  the  clause  purely  de- 
scriptive. 

He  has  gone  to  the  city  where  he  always  liked  to  visit. 


GEOGRAPHY — Questions. 

1.  Name  three  elements  of  climate.  Compare  the  climate  of 
the  State  of  Washington  with  that  of  Maine,  giving  reasons  for 
the  difference. 

2.  What  geographic  conditions  make  England  a  great  commer- 
cial nation?  Why  does  England  need  colonies?  Why  is  England 
a  strong  naval  power? 

3.  Name  at  least  five  geographic  conditions  that  determine  the 
location  of  cities.       Give  an  example  of  each. 

4.  Explain  fully  two  reasons  why  it  is  warmer  in  summer  than 
in  winter.       Explain  the  change  of  seasons. 

5.  Compare  the  industries  of  Plains,  Plateaus,  Mountains. 
Show  how  the  industries  of  each  are  determined  by  geographic 
conditions. 

6.  What  is  the  "Cotton  Belt?"  The  "Corn  Belt?"  What  geo- 
graphic conditions  determine  the  position  of  each? 

7.  China:  Position,  size,  population,  surface,  mineral  resources, 
products,  form  of  government,  recent  changes. 

8.  Name  three  ways  in  which  water  that  has  fallen  as  rain  may 
disappear.  Give  conditions  which  determine  which  of  three  things 
shall  happen.     Which  is  of  greatest  advantage  to  agriculture? 


14  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

9.  What  countries  lead  in  the  production  of  the  following: 
(1)  Coffee,  (2)  Corn,  (3)  Wool,  (4)  Diamonds,  (5)  Cotton?  What 
states  lead  in  the  production  of:  (1)  Hogs,  (2)  Wheat,  (3)  Rice, 
(4)  Oranges,   (5)   Cane  Sugar? 

10.  A  ship  sails  from  New  York  to  San  Francisco  via  Cape 
Horn.  Name,  in  order,  the  wind  belts  crossed,  giving  the  latitude 
of  each.  In  which  wind  belts  might  rainfall  be  expected?  Why? 
In  which  dry  weather?     Why? 

11.  Describe  the  topography  of  Northern  and  Southern  Ger- 
many. Show  the  influence  of  the  topography  on  industries  of  these 
regions. 

12.  What  is  the  atmosphere?  Name  its  constituents  and  give 
uses  of  each.       How  is  the  atmosphere  related  to  rainfall? 

13.  Name  six  life  zones  of  the  earth,  including  two  kinds  of 
forests,  two  kinds  of  grasslands,  and  two  kinds  of  deserts.  Discuss 
the  geographic  conditions  that  produce  each  kind. 

14.  What  is  meant  by  "conservation  of  natural  resources?" 
Name  the  natural  resources  that  should  be  conserved.  Select  one  of 
our  natural  resources  and  discuss  fully  ways  in  which  it  may  be 
conserved. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY. — Questions. 

1.  Contrast  the  Virginia  colony  with  the  Massachusetts  Bay 
Colony  with  regard  to  political  and  industrial  conditions. 

2.  What  conditions  favored  the  permanency  of  French  colonial 
dominion  in  North  America?  Why  did  such  dominion  prove  to  be 
only  temporary? 

3.  Tell  briefly  but  comprehensively  of  the  resistance  of  the  Eng- 
lish colonies  to  the  mother  country  from  the  Stamp  Act  to  the 
battles  of  Lexington  and  Concord. 

4.  Describe  briefly  but  comprehensively  the  western  movement, 
and  the  problems  involved  in  it,  in  the  twenty-five  or  thirty  years 
following  the  second  war  with  England. 

5.  Give  briefly  but  completely  an  account  of  the  Missouri  Com- 
promise. 

6.  Enumerate  five  of  the  most  important  weaknesses  of  the  Ar- 
ticles of  Confederation.  In  what  way  did  the  Constitution  remedy 
these  weaknesses? 

7.  In  the  quarter  century  following  the  establishment  of  the 
nation  under  the  Constitution,  what  were  the  most  important  events 
tending  to  give  the  United  States  standing  among  the  nations  of  the 
earth? 

8.  Give  briefly  the  story  of  the  annexation  of  Texas.  In  what 
way  did  that  connect  itself  with  the  Mexican  war? 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  15 

9  What  were  the  provisions  of  the  Kansas-Nebraska  Com- 
promise?    Why  did  it  give  new  vigor  to  the  slavery  controversy? 

10.  What  was  the  fundamental  cause  of  the  Civil  War?  What 
was  the  more  immediate  occasion  for  the  war? 

11  Assuming  the  Emancipation  Proclamation  to  have  been 
within  the  President's  constitutional  authority,  why  was  amendment 
still  necessary?       Give  two  reasons. 

12.  Enumerate  five  of  the  most  salutary  accomplishments  of  the 
Roosevelt  administration. 

13.  State  the  circumstances  leading  up  to  the  Spanish-American 
war. 

14  Enumerate  the  thirteen  English  colonies  in  the  approxi- 
mate order  of  their  settlement.  Which  was  the  first  settlement,  and 
when  established?     Which  was  the  best  and  when  established? 

ILLINOIS  HISTORY — Questions. 


1.  Name  five  Illinois  men  who  won  distinction  in  the  Civil  war. 

2.  State  the  advantages  of  Illinois  resulting  from  its  natural 
resources  and  its  geographical  situation. 

3.  Give  a  brief  account  of  the  steps  taken  in  the  admission  of 
Illinois  into  the  Union. 

4.  Give  a  brief  sketch  of  the  "Black  Hawk"  war. 

5.  Describe  fully  two  customs  of  the  early  settlers  which  have 
disappeared  from  the  life  of  the  people. 

6.  What  was  the  "Black  Code?"     Give  some  of  its  provisions. 

7.  Give  a  short  account  of  the  effort  to  make  Illinois  a  slave 
state. 

8.  What  part  did  Illinois  take  in  the  "Mexican  War?" 

9.  Discuss  the  Lincoln-Douglas  debate. 

10.  Who  was  the  "War  Governor"  of  Illinois?     Why  so  called? 

11.  How  many  constitutions  has  Illinois  had?  Give  dates  of 
their  adoption.     Give  one  leading  feature  of  each. 

12  What  Illinois  history  can  you  connect  with  these  places: 
Starved  Rock,  Galena.  Old  Salem  (on  the  Sangamon),  Nauvoo, 
Shawneetown,  Vandalia,  Alton,  Freeport. 

13.  Name  five  governors  of  Illinois  and  name  some  important 
event  in  the  administration  of  each. 

14.  Give  the  history  of  the  Illinois  Central  Railroad. 


16  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

Answers  To  Section  One 


HEADING. — Answers. 


By  Miss  Helen  Bryden,  Assistant  in  English,  Southern 
Illinois  State  Normal  University. 


1.  (a)  The  slaves,  who  v*ere  in  the  hold  of  the  vessel,  had  been 
captured  in  Africa. 

"Who  were  in  the  hold  of  the  vessel"  is  in  apposition,  therefore 
all  the  slaves  spoken  of  were  captured  in  Africa. 

(b)The  slaves  who  were  in  the  hold  of  the  vessel,  had  been 
captured  in  Africa.  This  indicates  a  limited  number.  Only  those 
who  were  in  the  hold  of  the  vessel,  had  been  captured. 

2.  (a)  So  every  bondman  in  his  own  hand,  bears  the  power  to 
cancel  his  captivity. 

Not  correct — a  man  cannot  be  in  his  own  hand. 

(b)  So  every  bondman,  in  his  own  hand  bears  the  power  to 
cancel  his  captivity. 

The  bondman  has  the  power  within  himself  to  become  free,  or  it 
may  be  literally  considered  that  he  carries  a  paper  (?)  with  him 
that  gives  him  freedom. 

3.  Arabian  Nights.  Fifth  and  Sixth  Grades.  (Simplified  Third 
Grade) 

Miles  Standish.     Sixth  and  Seventh  Grades. 
Hamlet,  High  School. 

Legend  of  Sleepy  Hollow.     Seventh  Grade. 
Reynard  the  Fox.     Second  Grade. 
Andersen's  Fairy  Tales.     First  and  Second  Grades. 
Idylls  of  the  King.     EigLih  Grade. 
The  Tale  of  Two  Cities.     High  School. 
The  Man  Without  a  Country.     Seventh  and  Eighth  Grades. 

Reproduction — Fifth  and  Sixth  Grades.      (Simplified.) 
Robinson  Crusoe.     Third  and  Fourth  Grades. 
Story  of  Ulysses.     Sixth  Grade.     It  can  be  taught  easily  in  the 

Third  and  Fourth  Grades'. 

4.  Second  half  of  First  Grade. 

Language  lesson — oral — on  "Secrets".  Who  have  them.  Christ 
mas  Secrets.     Birthday  Secrets.     Etc. 

Language  lesson — oral — on  the  Robin.  Its  breast  in  spring — in 
fall.     Stories  of  the  Robin.     Its  food.     Nest.     Eggs. 

Learn  to  recognize  these  words  or  other  unknown  words. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  17 

Children  "draw"  trees,  nests,   bird  in  tree. 

Head  the  story,     uraw  attention  to  nypnens. 

Teil  the  story. 

i^eai  u. 

At  story  hour  tiy  to  dramatize. 

auggesuve  outline,  ^iins — x.o.fc  ot  W&tu.re — Protection  of  birds — 
t>e  wormy  01  trust. 

5.  ii  a  ciiiiu  inlets  an  unfamiliar  word  in  me  ieauing  lesson 
nave  mm  try  to  get  it  pnoneucaiiy,  it  he  can  not,  iet  mm  listen  to 
one  ot  tne  cmidren  give  it.  it  tneie  is  a  worn  mat  can  not  be  got- 
ten phoneucau.v,  pronounce  it  lor  tne  chiia. 

t>.      (a;      jlou  nave  done  tiiat  >ou  snouid  oe  sorry  lor  . 

When  empnabito  is  placed  on  you,  it  gives  tne  uapression  mat. 
Catiaiua  uelievto  some  one  else  is  gmit.y,  and  crutub  as  empnatic  in 
saying,      aou  nave  uone  uai  .you  snouid  be  soiry  iur. 

(b)    "*ou  lia%e  done  tnat  you  snouid  be  sorry  lor". 

it  is  not  a  que&uon  01  tne  lUtare  uut  you  nave,  already,  done 
wrong. 

(O   "You  have  done  tnat  you  should  be  sorry  tor". 
Cassius  is  not  sorry,  out  ne  ought  to  oe. 

(d)   "iou  have  done  that  >ou  snouid  oe  sorry  for". 
Brutus    appeals    Kindi>,    sorrow iuliy,    Lo    Cast>ius'    conscience    tor 
repentance. 

t,e;    "lou  nave  uone  that  you  should   be  sorry  for". 
Again  Brutus  tells  Casoius  tne  deed  das  ueen  penormed,   that  he 
should  feel  repentant  for  it. 

(f)    You  ha*e  done  tnat  you  snouid  ue  sorry  tor. 

7.  The  Little  Red  Hen. 

1.  Draw  a  little  lien  on  the  board  or  put  up  the  picture  of  one. 

2.  Talk  to  the  children  auout  tins  little  nen. 

3.  Print  the  word  "lien"  on  the  board,  also  write  it. 
Have  little  devices  in  wmcli  this>  word  can  be  tound. 

4.  Let  the  children  pick  out  an> tiling  in  the  room  that  is  red, 
toucn  as  a  reu  riuuon,  apple,  crayon,  etc. 

5.  Write  the  word. 

t>.  The  word  seed  is  brought  out  by  the  object. 

7.  The  teacher  points  to  the  different  words  and  the  children 

touch  the  object. 

8.  Teacher  spells  the  words  phonetically  and     the     children 

pick  out  the  object. 

This  method  is  carried  thru  the  story.  (Repetition  is  valuable 
in  this  story). 

Let  the  cildren  tell  the  story  in  their  own  way. 

They  have  learned  the  process  of  the  little  seed  to  the  loaf  of 
bread. 

8.  (a)    "Splendor" — the  liquid  sound  is  stronger  and  the  word 

connotes  a  richness  and  brightness,  combined  with  col- 
ors, that  the  word  sunset  fails  to  do.  Splendor  is  less 
definite  and  more  suited  to  the  style  of  this  poem. 


18  ILLINOIS  STA1L   QUESTION   BOOK. 

(b)  "Summits".     The  thought  of   height  is  attractive.      The 

snow  is  not  on  all  the  mountain,  it  is  on  the  top,  the 
"summit". 

(c)  "Old  in  story".     A  great  many     authors     have     written 

about  the  "snow-capped  mountains",  therefore  the 
thought  is  old. 

9.  (a)  The  theme  of  the  Bugle  song  is,  our  influence  never  dies. 
(b)  In  the  third  stanza,  the  third  and  fourth  lines,  emphasis 

should  he  placed  on  "Our",  "roll",  "soul",  "soul", 
"grow",  "forever". 

"Our  echoes  roll  from  soul  to  soul, 
And  grow  forever  and  forever". 

10.  (a)    "Wild  echoes".      The  echoes  are  wild   because  they   fly 

from  one  point  to  another  and  are  not  still  a  moment, 
until  they  go  away. 

(b)  "horns  of  Elfland".      Elfland  is  the  land   where  the  elf 

and  the  fairy  live.  The  echoes  grow  so  faint  and  la;1 
away  that  it  sounds  as  if  the  elves  were  blowing  their 
tiny  horns. 

(c)  "rich  sky".     Rich  in  colorings  of  the  sunset,  red,  golden 

and  violet. 

(d)  "purple  glens".      The  sun  rays  are  above  The  glen   and 

the  twilight  in  the  glen  has  a  purple  tinge. 

(e)  "leaps  in  glory".     The  water  comes  down   the  mountain 

with  such  rapidity  that  it  does  not  simply  fall,  it  springs 
and  leaps  over  the  rocks  and  the  rays  of  the  sunlight 
make  it  golden  and  sparkling" — "glory". 

11.  (a)   Phonics  is  the  "key  note"  to  reading. 

(b)  "The  differences  between  reading  and  literature  are 
largely  due  to  content  and  aim".  Southern  Illinois 
State  Normal  Training  School  Manual. 

Reading  may  be  of  a  literary  or  didactic  type.  "The  great  mass 
of  reading  done  in  school  is  didactic  History,  Geography,  etc.. 
are  didactic".  Thus  reading  of  this  style  takes  by  far  the  great- 
er amount  of  time. 

"Reading,  as  literature,  stands  alone  in  the  school  curriculum. 
No  other  subject  can  give  skill  in  the  interpretation  of  discourses 
of  this  kind.  Hence  the  bulk  of  reading  placed  on  the  program 
should  be  of  the  literary  form  and  content".  Manual  of  Course  of 
Study,   Training   Department  of   Southern   Illinois   State   Normal. 

The  reading  class  must  be  for  preparation  for  reading  and  for 
the  reading.  If  dramatization  is  to  be  given  (by  children)  do  not 
use  the  reading  period  for  it.  It  is  very  important  as  all  worli  de- 
pends upon  the  power  to  interpret  the  reading.  "Oral  reading  is 
mental  process". 

In  the  first  two  grades  the  children  usually  read  two  or  three 
times  a  day  but  from  the  third  grade  to  the  High  School,  once  a 
day. 

12.  (a)    "Low-vaulted   paet".      The   pearly   nautilus   first   lives   in 

a  low,  slightly  dome  like  one  "roomed"  shell,  as  it 
grows  it  builds  an  addition  to  this;   larger,  higher  and 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  I9 

shuts  off  the  old  home  by  a  cloned  door.     Then  growtii 
continues  until  the  nautilus  is  lull  grown. 
Soul  iiie.     i^uch  event  in  our  hie  auouid  make  us  grow 
away  li'Oiii  anything  chat  is  low  or  uat.  i^w  ideals.  Leave 
the  past  and  nave  highei  ideais. 

(b)  "Outgrown  sheii  .  as  we  gxow  intellectually  and  spir- 
itually, our  loiiiier  mougnts  una  life  are     Outgrown". 

(cj  "hue's  unresting  sea".  The  nautilus  dies  ana  leaves  its 
shell  upon  me  seashore  and  is  tossed  auont  uy  the  rest- 
less waves,  so  we  leave  our  bouies  on  hie  "earth-sea", 
where  00  much  unrest  is  ieit  by  the  living. 

(d)  Tne    boui    ouilds    mansions    by    navmg    purer,    stronger 

LnoughLS,  feelings  and  acts. 

(e)  "New   temple."     i^ach  victory  that  we  win  over  ourselves, 

is  a  growtii.  Every  advance  we  niaKe,  aduo  to  this 
growtn  and  Lne  whole  makes  a  more  oeauciiui  ihe  and 
the  spirit  is  111  a  newer,  clearer  atmospnere. 

13.  (a).        i  lain   would  learn  to  lie." 

if  "i"  is  emphasized,  it  inters  that  another  person 
does  he  and  tne  tool  is  reah>   accusing  the  person. 

(bj.  'I  lain  would  learn  to  lie."  This  indicates  a  desire 
to  iearn   tne  power  or  art  oi   telling   lies. 

(c).  "i  lam  would  learn  to  lie."  1  do  not  know  how  to 
he  out  1  should  like  to  learn  to  do  so. 

(d).  '  i  lain  would  iearn  to  lie."  iheie  is  sarcasm,  a  re- 
proof, a  challenge  that  some  one  (King  Lear)  has 
lieu  and  King  .Lear  is  angry.  The  thought  is  implied 
that  lie  cau  do  other  tiungs  but  has  not  reached  the 
point  of  being  able  to  lie. 

14.  Rip  Van  Kinkle. 

A.  The  teacher's  object  is  to  awaken  a  love  for  pure,  simple 

story  reading. 

The  pupil's  purpose  is  to  gain  a  love  of  knowledge 
and  note  changes  in  a  short  time  in  America.  Pat- 
riotism. 

B.  Approach — Irving's   Biography,  History  of   England  as 

connected  with  American  History  during  the  reign  of 
George  11  and  George  ill,  Geography  of  the  Katskill 
Mountains  and  Knickerbocker  History. 

C.  Plan   of   Procedure. 
Basis  of  the  story. 

Note  book  for  new  words  and  new  meanings. 

Four   views.      1.   Rip   as  a   boy.        2.   As   a  young   man. 

3.   His  mountain  trip  and  his  sleep.     Tell  of  the  sup- 
erstition  concerning  the  mountains.      4.   His  return. 
Purpose  of  the  descriptive  introduction?      How  does  it 

affect   the   story?      How   does   the  author  handle  the 

supernatural? 
In  reading,  note  1.   Forecasts.     2  Points  of  suspense.     3. 

The    Principal    and    also    the    subordinate   characters. 

Why  are  the  subordinate  characters  so  classed? 
Climax. 
Purpose  of  the  author? 


20  ILLINOIS  STA1L  QUESTION  BOOK. 

Note  bits  of  humor,  pathos,  dialogue,  beauty. 

Most  dramatic  situation. 

Authors  aim  in  having  Rip  return  just  at  the  time  or 
the  election? 

White  paragraphs  on:  1.  Characters.  2.  Personal  ap- 
pearance of  Rip.     3.   Nine-pins.      4.   Early  New  York. 

Sometimes  a  class  enjoys  the  writing  of  a  dramatic 
scene,  by  using  the  dialog  for  the  scene,  without  the 
descriptions  or  explanations. 

The  reading  class  is  for  the  reading  aloud  of  the  as- 
signed  work. 

Silent  reading  reported   by   "Book   Reviews"   should  be 
assigned  on  an  average  of  once  every  six  weeks. 
The  Pied  Piper  of  Hamelin. 

A.  The  teacher's  purpose  is  to  arouse  a  love  for  classic  poetry. 

The  pupil's  purpose  is  to  gain  a  knowledge  of  rhyme  and 
rhythm  and  the  art  of  narrative  in  poetry. 

B.  Approach.     Biography  of  Browning. 

Situation.      Geography.      Customs.      Origin  of  the  idea  of 

the  story. 
Keep  a  note  book  with  a  list  of  unknown  words.     Pupil's 
look  them  up  and  write  the  meaning  that  suits  the  con- 
text. 
1.      Find  the  keynote.     2.   Forecast.     3.   Suspenses.     4.    Learn  the 
meaning  of  the  plot.     5.   What  characters  are  important  in  helping 
in   the   development  of   the    plot?      6.   Is   the   climax   suitable?      7. 
purpose    of    the    author.      Discussions    on    the    following    subjects: 
Did  the  people  deserve  the  punishment?      Who   were   responsible? 
Who  were  punished?     A  town   without  children.      8.   Bits  of  good 
description   and   a   touch    of    pathos.      8.   Secret   of   rhythm.      Mark 
end  words  to  show  difference  in  rhyme  as  follows:     Stanza  1.  a,  1), 
c,  c,  c,  b,  d,  d,  b.     Stanzas  2.  a,  a,  b,  a,  b,  a,  a,  a,  c,  c,  c. 

Time  of  preparation  in  seventh  and  eighth  grades  in  English 
work  should  be  one  and  one-half  or  two  times  the  length  of  the 
recitation. 


ARITHMETIC. — Answers. 

By  David  Felmley,  President  Illinois  State  Normal 
University 


a 

b 

c 

d 

365 

360 

365 

303 

123 

248 

198 

177 

In  a,  each  term  of  the  subtrahend  is  smaller  than  the  cor- 
responding term  of  the  minuend  and  may  be  subtracted 
directly. 

In  b,  1  ten  in  the  minuend  must  be  changed  to  10  ones  from 
which  8  ones  may  then  be  subtracted. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  21 

In  c,   one  ten  in  the  minuend  must  be  changed  to   10  ones 
and  added  to  the   5   ones;    from  the  sum   15   ones  the  8 
ones  may  be  taken. 
In    d,    there    are    no    tens    in    the    minuend,    hence    we    must 
change  1  hundred  to  tens,  and  then  1  of  the  tens  to  ones. 
We  then  subtract  7  ones  from  13  ones,  7  tens  from  the  9 
tens   remaining,    and    1    hundred   from   the   two   hundreds 
remaining. 
2.      We  first   change  the  numbers  to  the  same,  decimal  denom- 
ination,   then   the   fractions   to   equivalents   having   the   same   frac- 
tional unit,  then  add. 
Add. 

1.11/9        =1.1111/9        =1.11122         | 

.025  1/2=    .025  1/2      =    .025  •»       1198 
1/11  =    .090  10/11    =    .090  iso      | 


1.227  103/198 
(b) 

1.   Reducing  mixed  numbers  to  improper  fractions: 
24  5      11 

11              2       6 
X 


15 


4 

2.  Performing  subtraction  in  second  factor: 
24  4 

11               « 
X 


15 


4 

3.   Multiplying  both   terms   of   first  factor  by    44,   of  *«cond 
fraction  by  6: 

96  1  16 


X 


165  6  165 

t. 

c=3.1416Xd.  Hence,   d- 


3.1416 
548.76  ft. -K3. 1416=174.6753  or  174.68— ft. 

Area=*r*     =  ^!_=^i=^ 
4        4tt2        4jt 


22  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

I  may  use  either  of  the  following  formulae: 

A=7ir2    or  A:==z- 


4tt 

I  know  the  true  value  of  c,  but  only  an  approximate  val- 
ue of  d  or  r.  Hence  the  second  formula  only  will  give 
a  correct  result,  true  to  .01   sq.   ft. 

d=l  74.68  —ft. 
r=87.34— ft. 
r2  =7628.27— sq.  ft. 
nr2  =23964.99— sq-   ft. 

This  result  is  too  large  because  we  have  squared  a  value  of  r 
that  is  too  large. 

c=548.76  ft. 

c2  =301137.5376  sq.  ft 

^-=75284.3844  sq.  ft. 

—=23963.71—  sq.  ft. 

This  result  is  true  to  .01  sq.  ft. 

Wanted— .032X1728.4 
%? 

This  means —    of  1728.4 

1000 

of      1728.4=1.7284 


1000 
32 


of      1728.4=32X  1.7284=55.3088 


1000 

To  multiply  by  a  fr  action  involves  two  processes. 

1.  To  take  the  fract  <  ^al  part  of  the  multiplicand  that  is 
indicated  by  the  denominator  of  the  fraction. 

2.  To  multiply  this  result  by  the  numerator. 

If  the  multiplier  is  a  decimal  fraction  we  perform  the 
first  operation  by  moving  the  decimal  point  in  the  divi- 
dend to  the  left  —  one  place  if  the  denominator  is  10, 
two  places  if  it  is  100  (that  is  (10)2)  three  places  if  it 
is  1000,  (10)3  etc.  Hence  we  may  perform  the  work  in 
this  fashion: 

1728.4  1.7284 

.032  32 


55,3088 
It  is  evident  that  in  the  new  multiplicand,  and     in     the 
product  we  have  as  many  decimal  places  as  in  both  multi- 
plicand and  multiplier. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  23 

The  Tolume  of  a  cube  6"  on  each  edge  is  216  cu.  in  Hence  the  volume 
of  the  half-cube  is  108  cu.  in.  The  iwo  triangular  bases  of  the  half-cube 
put  together  form  a  6*x6"  square  Hence  their  area  equals  36  square 
inches.     (See  Fig.  1.) 

The  two  faces  of  the  original  cube  that  serve  as  faces  of  the  half- cube 
are  two  6"x6"  squares.  Their  total  area-=72  sq.  in.  The  face  formed  by 
the  cutting  plane  is  a  rectangle,  whose  base  is  the  diagonal  of  a  6"x6" 
square. 

The  diagonal  of  any  square  equals  its  side  multiplied  by  V  2 

6"X  V2  =6"X1.4142=8.4852  inches 

The  area  of  the  rectangle  6X8  4852"  is  50.9112  sq.  in. 

Whole  surface=36  sq     in. +72  sq.  in.  +50.^112  sq.   in.= 
158.9112sq.  in 
6. 

3  meters=30  decimeters. 

A  prism  1  decimeter  square  and  30  decimeters  long  contains 
30  cu .  dm . 

One  cubic  decimeter  of  water  weighs  one  kilogram. 

One  cu.  dm    of  iron  weighs  7.2  kg. 

30  cu.  dm.  of  iron  weighs  30X7.2  kg.,  or  216  kg. 
7. 

In  similar  plane  figures   the  area-ratio    is  the  square  of   the 
ling-ratio. 

The  area-ratio  of  the_second  triangle  to  the  first  riangle  is  2# 

Hence  the  line-ratio  is   V  2  or  1.4142. 

The  base  of  the  second  triangle    is  1.4142X40   ft.  or    56.568 
feet. 

8. 

Days   of  grace  have   been   abolished  in   Illinois,   hence   no 
allowance  for  them  should  be  made  in  this  problem. 
Since  this  90-day  note  was  discounted  on  January   2  7,  2  6 
days    after    the    note    was    made,    the    period    of    discount 
was  90 — 26,  or  64  days. 

The  discount  for  64  days  at  7  %  was 

64  7 

—    of  _    of    $800    or  $9.96 

Net  proceeds=$800— $9.96=$790.04 

9. 

10%   of  the  list  price=l/10  of  the  list  price. 

The  net  price  after  1st  discount  =  9/10  of  the  list  price. 

Net  price  after  2d  discount  =  9/10  of  9/10  of  list  price. 

=  81/100  of  list  price. 

Since  $82.60  =  81%   of  list  price. 

$1.0198  =  1%   of  list  price. 

$101.98=  (100%    of)   list  price. 


24  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

10. 

(a)  1%    of  2. 465  =  . 02465. 

(b)  16.5  =  200%    of  8.25. 

(c)  48.65  =  as  many  per  cent  of  12.36. 
as  it  is  times  one  per  cent  of  12.36. 

1  per  cent  of  12.36  is  .1236. 
48.65  is  393.6  times  .1236. 
Hence  48.65  is  393.6%    of  12.36. 


11. 


(a) 

$8.50 

7 


$59.50 
Language — 

1  per  cent  of  $850  Is  $8.50. 

7  per  cent  of  $850  is  7  times  $8.50,  whicb  is  $59.50. 
(b) 

6j$48 


$8 
100 


$800 

Since  $48  equal  6  per  cent  of  the  required  sum,  one  per 
cent  of  the  required  sum  equals  1/6  of  $48,  which  is  $8. 
100  per  cent  of  the  required  sum  (or  the  required  sum) 
equals  100  times  $8  or  $800 

5%  of  req.  no.= of  req.    no. 


20 
of    req.    no=32 


1 

20 

20 

of    req    no.:=640 

20  H 

Since  5%  of  any  number    is—  of  that  number,    and   since 

J  20 

■4-  of  the  required  number  is    32,    J2_  of  the  required  number  is 

20  ^  20  ^ 

20  times  32,  or  640. 

12.  All  of  the  five  given  statements  are  not  true, 
(a) 

We  cannot  add  unlike  numbers.      24   dollars  and   5  0   per 
cent  are  unlike. 

If  the  expression  meant  $24  +  50%    of  $24,  it  still  would 
hot  be  true  for  $24  +  50%   of  $24  =  $36. 
(b) 

We  cannot  divide  a  number  of  cubic  inches  by  a  number 
of  inches.      There  are  only  two  kinds  of   division. 
In  measurement  the  dividend  and  divisor  are  of  the  same 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  25 

denomination   and   the   quotient  is  abstract;    as, 

28  cu.  in.  H- 7  cu.  in.  =  4. 
In   partition   the   divisor   is   abstract  and   the   quotient   is 
of  the  same  denomination  as  the  dividend. 

28  cu.  in.  -f-  7  =  1/7  of  28  cu.  in.  or  4  cu.  in. 
(c) 

Only  numbers  have  square  roots;   quantities,  surfaces,  or 
areas  have  no  square  roots.     The  given  expression  may  be 
interpreted  to  mean  "The  side  of  a  square  containing  900 
sq.  ft.  is  30  ft. 
(d) 

This  expression  is  badly  printed  but  is  nonsensical  if  the 
error  in  the  fourth  fraction  be  corrected. 
The  expression   $2/3    -f-    $3/5   means 
what  is  the  ratio  of  $2/3  to  $3/5 

or,  two  thirds  of  a  dollar  is  what  part  of  three-fifths  of  a 
dollar. 

The  analysis  may  run  this  way: 
One  dollar  is   5/3   of    (3/5   of  a   dollar) 
2/3  of  one  dollar  is  2/3  of  5/3  of  (3/5  of  a  dollar) 
or  it  is  10/9  of   (3/5  of  a  dollar) 
The  analysis  may  run  this  way: 

$2/3  =  $10/15 

$3/5  =  $9/15. 
The  question  now  reads — 

10/15  of  a  dollar  is  what  part  of  9/15  of  a  dollar. 
Now  1/15  of  a  dollar  is  1/9  of  9/15  of  a  dollar, 
Hence  10/15  of  a  dollar  is  10/9  of  9/15  of  a  dollar. 
The  division  is  measurement  and  the  quotient  is  abstract. 

(e) 

If  a  compound  number  is  of  hr.,  min.,  sec,  the  product 
formed  by  adding  15  such  numbers  will  be  composed  of 
hrs.,  minutes  and  seconds. 

It  is  right  to  say  that  the  difference  in  longitude  between 
two  places  is  fifteen  times  as  many  degrees,  minutes  and 
seconds,    as    there    are    hours,    minutes,    and    seconds    re- 
spectively in  the  difference  in  time. 
13     The  altitude  of  the  equilateral  triangle  is  also  the  altitude  of 
the  right  triangle  CDA.  whose  hypotenuse  is  1  and  whose  base 
is  J/2,  using  the  side  CA  as  the  unit.     Hence  the  square    of  the 
altitude  is  equal  to  the  square  of  the  hypotenuse  minus  the  square 
of  the  base.      (See  Fig.  2  ) 

CD2  -=CA2  ~AD2    or  Alt.2  =12  —  (l/2)2 
Alt.2  =1—  Vi,  or  % 
Alt.    =V-5i,  or  .866  + 
The  ratio  of  .866  to  1  is  .866 


26 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 


0) 

The  diagonal  of  the  cube,  AD,  is  the  hypotenuse  of  the  right 
triangle  APD.      (See  Fig.  3.) 

Tiie  base,  DP,  of  this  right  triangle,  APD,  is  aiso  the 
hypotenuse  of  the  right  triangle  PCD  and  may  be  called  the 
diagonal  of  the  face  of  the  cube 

PC,  CD,  AP,  are  edges  of  the  cube,  hence  they  are  each  one 
u?iit  in  length. 

(1)  AD2  =AP2  +PD2 

(2)  But  PD2  =PC2  +CD2 

Substituting  this  value  of  PD2    in  equation  (1),  we  have 

AD2  =~AP2  +PC2  +CD2 

(Diag.)2  =1_2  +  12  -hi2  ,  or  3 

Diagonal    V  3  ,  or  1.73205 

The  ratio  of  1.73205  to  1  is  1.73205 


14. 


$8,000.  Springfield,   Illinois,   Jan.    4,    1914. 

For  value  received,  two  years  after  date,  I  promise 
to  pay  to  William  Roe,  or  order,  at  the  First  National 
Bank  of  Springfield,  Illinois,  Eight  Thousand  Dollars, 
with  interest  at  five  per  cent  per  annum. 

JOHN   DOE 
Endorsements — 

1.  Pay  to  John  Jones,  or  order, 

William    Roe. 

2.  John   Jones. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  27 

CIVICS. — Answers. 


By  H.  Ambrose  Perrin,  Superintendent  of  Schools, 
Lincoln,   Illinois 


1.  The  purpose  of  government  is  to  direct  and  manage  affairs 
that  concern  alike  all  people  composing  a  group.  This  group  may 
be  large  or  small.  The  source  of  government  in  the  United  States 
is  vested  in  the  will  of  the  people  as  expressed  by  their  votes  or 
thru  their  representatives. 

2.  The  "town"  of  New  England  is  a  local  government  unit. 
It  embraces  from  twenty  to  forty  square  miles  of  territory.  Prac- 
tically, it  provides  lor  all  the  affairs  of  the  town  and  has  officers 
for  the  same.  In  this  system  the  county  plays  a  relatively  insig- 
nificant part.  Tl  e  officers  are:  Selectmen,  Town  Clerk,  Assessor 
and  Treasurer,  Overseer  of  the  Poor,  Constables,  School  Commit- 
tee, Justice  of  the  Peace,  Road  Surveyors,  Pound  Keeper,  Fence 
Viewer,   and  other  minor  officers. 

The  "township  as  ordinarily  used  means  the  town  idea  of  gov- 
ernment applied  so  that  there  is  a  more  even  distribution  of  powers, 
duties  and  officers  between  the  town  and  the  county.  This  is  often 
spoken  of  as  a  township  because  it  often  agrees  with  the  Congres- 
sional Township.  In  Illinois  they  are  supposed  to  be  organized 
townships  as  provided  by  law.  However,  but  few  Illinois  so-cailed 
towns  or  townships  correspond  to  the  Congressional  Townships 
The  officers  of  the  township  are:  Supervisor,  Clerk,  Assessor,  Col- 
lector, Constables,  Highway  Commissioners,  Justices  of  the  Peace 
and  some  other  minor  officers  as  needed.  In  Illinois,  these  officers 
are  elected  on  the  first  Tuesday  of  April. 

3.  A  representative's  term  is  two  years,  senator's  term  is  six 
years,  President's  term  is  four  years,  and  Judge  of  the  United 
States  Supreme  Court  has  a  life  term  on  good  behavior. 

4.  Civil  service  is  the  use  of  the  merit  system  in  public  ser- 
vice. It  eliminates  office  changes  dne  to  political  reverses  and  in- 
sures efficient  and  stable  service. 

Diplomatic  service  is  our  system  of  U.  S.  representatives  to  for- 
eign nations.  Such  representatives  administer  political  relation- 
ships between  our  nation  and  the  nations  to  which  they  are  dele- 
gated. 

Consular  service  is  our  system  of  commercial  representatives  to 
foreign  nations.  Such  representatives  are  stationed  at  most  ports 
and  large  cities.  They  look  after  our  commercial  interests,  admin- 
ister the  estates  of  deceased  Americans  and  other  duties  in  looking 
after  the  Avelfare  of  Americans  abroad. 

5.  A  writ  of  habaes  corpus  is  a  legal  instrument  by  which  a 
person  accused  of  a  crime  may  be  brought  into  court  and  the 
cause  of  his  imprisonment  or  confinement  investigated. 

A  bill  of  attainder  is  a  bill  inflicting  death  or  other  punishment 
without  judicial  trial. 

Appellate  jurisdiction  means  tMt  appeal  may  be  taken  to  said 
court  after  the  case  has  been  tried  in  the  lower  courts. 


28  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

An  ex  post  facto  law  is  one  which  makes  an  act  a  crime  which 
was  not  so  when  the  act  was  committed  or  which  increases  tne  pen- 
alty named  in  the  statutes. 

An  indictment  is  ihe  official  paper  furnished  by  the  grand  jury 
to  the  court  when  it  Cjury)  has  investigated  criminal  charges  com- 
mitted in  the  county  against  a  person  and  advises  tnat  sucn  person 
be  brought  to  trial. 

6.  In  the  town  system  of  county  government,  each  town  elects 
one  or  more  supervisors,  according  to  population,  who  serve  as 
members  of  the  County  Board  of  Supervisors. 

In  the  county  system  of  county  government,  there  is  a  Board 
of  County  Commissioners  elected  from  the  whole  county.  The  du- 
ties of  both  boards  are  about  the  same,  namely  the  transaction 
or  county  business.  The  Commissioner  system  centralizes  county 
affairs  and  tiie  management  of  the  same.  The  Supervisor  system 
divides  the  powers  and  most  local  matters  are  taken  care  of  by 
township  officers. 

7.  Each  senatorial  district  is  entitled  to  eiect  three  members 
at  the  same  time  to  the  lower  house  of  tne  general  assembly,  ihe 
minority  party  usually  nominates  only  one  or  two  candidates  in- 
stead of  three.  The  voters  'plump  '  casting  1  1-2  votes  for  eacn 
or  3  votes  for  one,  thus,  in  most  cases,  insuring  tiie  election  of  a 
minority  representative. 

8.  Illinois  .provides  that  the  following  may  be  excused  from 
jury  service;  Public  Officers,  Ministers,  Teachers,  Physicians,  Phar- 
macists, Undertakers  and  Embalniers,  Firemen  (Fire  Department) 
Dentists  and  Trained  Nurses. 

This  provision  is  based  upon  the  importance  of  the  social  ser- 
vice constantly  rendered  the  community  and  state.  In  some  cases 
a  jury  is  held  for  days  and  even  weeks. 

9.  The  great  argument  for  the  electoral  system  of  electing 
the  President  originally  was  that  the  electors  chosen  would  be 
men  versed  in  political  problems  and  would  vote  their  decisions  as 
to  the  candidate  most  fit  to  undertake  the  work  of  President. 

The  great  argument  against  the  electoral  system  is  that  in  prac- 
tice the  electors  blindly  follow  the  dictates  of  the  party.  However 
under  the  popular  election  of  electors  the  electoral  system  amounts 
to  a  popular  election  of  the  President  by  an  indirect  method.  A 
further  argument  against  the  system  is  that  it  does  not  truly  rep- 
resent the  true  wishes  of  the  people. 

10.  Dividing  the  total  population  of  the  state  as  shown  by  the 
last  U.  S.  census  by  the  congressional  ratio  gives  the  number  of 
representatives.  The  ratio  is  the  quotient  found  by  dividing  the 
total  U.  S.  population  by  the  number  of  members  the  house  is  to 
contain  after  the  new  apportionment  which  is  made  after  the  de- 
cennial census.  Each  state  is  entitled  to  at  least  one  representa- 
tive. 

11.  The  most  important  committee  in  the  house  of  represent- 
atives is  the  Ways  and  Means  Committee.  Its  chief  duty  is  to  de- 
termine the  amount  of  money  needed  to  run  the  government  and 
to  choose  methods  for  raising  the  same. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  29 

12.  When  a  bill  is  introduced  in  either  house,  it  is  read  by 
title,  ordered  printed  and  referred  to  a  proper  committee  for  con 
sideration.  If  the  bill  is  reported  out  favorably  by  ilie  committee, 
it  comes  up  for  a  second  reading  at  which  time  amendments  may 
be  offered.  After  the  second  reading,  the  bill  is  ordered  to  be  en- 
grossed for  a  third  reading.  The  vote  on  the  final  passage  is  by 
yeas  and  nays  and  is  entered  in  the  journal.  The  bill  is  now  sent 
to  the  other  house  where  it  goes  thru  the  same  procedure,  if 
passed  as  amended  by  both  houses,  it  goes  to  the  governor  lor  his 
signature. 

13.  A  fugitive  from  justice  may  be  returned  to  the  state  in 
which  the  crime  was  committed  by  the  governor  issuing  a  writ 
known  as  a  requisition  upon  the  governor  of  the  state  in  which 
the  fugitive  is  found.  The  wole  process  of  removing  by  requisition 
a  person  from  one  state  to  another  for  trial  is  called  extradition. 

14.  The  implied  powers  are  based  upon  the  elastic  clause, 
"Congress  shall  have  power  to  make  all  laws  which  shall  be  ne- 
cessary and  proper  for  carrying  into  execution  the  foregoing  pow- 
ers, and  all  other  powers  vested  by  this  Constitution  in  the  govern- 
ment of  the  United  States,  or  in  any  department  or  office  thereof." 

A  practical  application  of  this  implied  power  is  the  establish- 
ment of  the  U.  S.  Bank  by  advice  of  Alexander  Hamilton.  Hamil- 
ton claimed  "necessary  and  proper"  to  mean  suitable,  not  indis- 
pensable. 


STATE    COURSE    OP    STUDY. — Answers 

By  Charles  Mcintosh,   Superintendent  Piatt  County   Schools 
and  Editor  of  Illinois  State  Course  of  Study 


1.  Reading,  including  phonics  and  spelling,  Language,  Number 
and  Construction  Work,  Writing  and  General  Exercises,  including 
music,  drawing,  Morals  and  Maimers  and  Nature  Study,  which  in 
eludes   physiology   and   hygiene. 

2.  All  things  in  our  environment  to  which  we  attend  help  to 
educate  us,  hence  the  School  Library  may  be  made  an  instrument 
of  great  value  in  educating  the  children. 

(1)  By    furnishing    plenty    of    easy    but    interesting    reading 
material    for    the    pupils    in    the    primary    grades    (grades 
1-3)   the  desire  of  the  pupils  to  read  this  material  cause 
them    to   get  a   large  amount  of   practice   in   reading   and 

helps  them  to  master  the  mechanics  of  reading. 

(2)  It  helps  to  develop  in  the  pupil  the  power  of  easy  and 
rapid  reading,  without  which  their  progress  in  the  upper 
grades  can  not  be  what  it  should. 

(3)  It  helps  the  pupils  to  acquire  the  reading  habit — a  hab- 
it in  which  the  pipils  read  for  the  pleasure  thus  afford- 
ed them. 

(4)  It  helps  pupils  to  learn  how  to  use  books.  Books  of 
reference  are  of  little  value  to  a  poor  reader,  but  to  a 
good   reader   all   knowledge   is   accessible. 


30  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

(5)  It  helps  pupils  to  acquire  a  fund  of  information  about 
many  subjects,  makes  them  better  informed  and  gives 
them  a  wider  outlook  upon  the  world,  and  gives  each  a 
wider  view  of  his  own  possibilities. 

The  school  library  possesses  all  these  values,  it  is  need- 
less to  say,  only  when  it  is  intelligently  and  wisely  used. 
There  should  be  two  kinds  of  books  in  the  library.  First, 
books  suitable  to  the  children  of  all  grades  of  high  mor- 
al tone  which  pupils  will  find  delight  in  reading.  Sec- 
ond, books  that  give  further  information  than  their  text 
books  on  the  subjects  they  are  studying  in  their  classes. 
In  other  words,  general  reading  books  and  reference 
books.     Both  are  indispensable  in  every  library. 

3.  The  four  aims  of  the  State  Course  as  given  in  the  introduc- 
tion are  as  follows: 

First. — To  furnish  as  a  basis  of  work,  to  superintendents,  teach- 
ers and  directors,  an  outline  of  the  various  branches  required  by 
law  to  be  taught  in  the  schools  of  the  State,  arranged  in  the  sever- 
al grades,  in  accordance  with  established  and  approved  methods. 

Second. — To  advance  the  pupil  step  by  step,  thru  his  school 
life,  giving  him  sredit  for  work  done,  and  thereby  lessening  the 
evil  effects  of  a  too  frequent  change  of  teachers. 

Third. — To  unify  the  work  in  the  common  schools  of  the  county 
by  furnishing  the  basis  for  a  closer  and  more  effective  direction 
and  supervision,  and  for  comparing  by  means  of  examinations,  or 
written  reviews,  the  results  secured  in  the  different  schools. 

Fourth. — To  enable  directors  and  parents  to  know  better  what 
the  common  schools  are  accomplishing  for  their  children  and  to 
co-operate  with  teachers  in  the  work. 

4.  No  one  thing  has  ever  done  more  to  uplift  the  rural  schools 
than  the  introduction  and  intelligent  use  of  the  State  Coarse  of 
Study.  Many  rural  pupils  move  about  from  one  school  to  anoth- 
er. This  moving  is  usually  done  in  February  or  March, — at  a 
time  when  the  interest  in  the  school  is  at  its  highest  point,  and 
unless  the  school  to  which  they  go  is  doing  substantially  the  same 
grade  of  work  as  the  school  from  which  they  come,  the  pupils 
suffer  a  distinct  loss.  Teachers  of  rural  schools  are  frequently 
changed.  Many  of  these  teachers  are  young  and  inexperienced 
Often  they  are  without  professional  training  of  any  kind.  In  many 
cases  they  have  never  attended  a  country  school  temselves.  Be- 
cause of  these  conditions,  the  rural  schools  need  a  fixed  and  a  de- 
finite course  of  study.  Without  some  unifying  agency,  without  a 
course  of  study  and  a  definite  plan  of  organization  carefully  work- 
ed out,  much  of  the  time  and  energy  of  both  teachers  and  pupils 
are  wasted.  In  making  the  State  Course,  the  conditions  as  they 
exist  in  rural  schools  have  been  kept  constantly  in  mind,  and  an 
effort  has  been  made  to  get  the  best  possible  course  for  the  rural 
schools. 

5.  Alternation  is  the  systematic  and  regular  union  of  two 
grades  of  pupils  on  consecutive  years  of  work,  both  grades  doing 
the  work  of  one  year  in  one  class,  while  the  other  year's  work  is 
entirely  omitted.  The  next  year,  the  work  omitted  is  taken  up, 
and  the  first  year's  work  dropped.     In  this  way,  the  pupils  in  the 


ILLINOIS  STAYS  QUESTION   BOOK.  31 

seventh  and  eighth  years'  work  can  be  taught  in  the  same  class, 
likewise  the  pupils  in  the  fifth  and  sixth  years'  work.  In  the  pri- 
mary grades,  the  language  work  for  the  third  and  fourth  years  is 
arranged  to  alternate, — one  year  both  classes  taking  the  third 
year's  work  and  the  next  year  both  taking  the  fourth  year's  work. 


6. 
Begin 

9:00 

0:10 

9:10 

9:20 

9:30 

9:45 

9:55 
10:00 
10:15 
10:30 
10:45 
10:55 
11:  )5 
11:15 
11:30 
11:40 
11:50 


Suggestive  program  for  the  forenoon  of  a  one  room  school. 


Time 

10 
10 

10  . 
10: 
10  . 
10 
5 
15 
15 

Recess 
10 
10 
10 
10 
10 
10 
10  • 


Seventh 

«** 


Year  Recitation 

All  Open  Ex. 

1  Primary  Wk. 

2  Number 

3  Arith. 
7              Arith.  *** 

4  Arith.  Read. 
All           Teacher  direct*    seat  work 
5 


Fifth     Third     Second     First 


Arith.        Arith.        Arith. 


No. 

**• 


** 
Seat  Wk 


***  No. 

Arith.    Spell    Hand 
Hand  Wk. 


Arith. 
Reading 

Primary  work 
Spelling- 
Reading 
Grammar 
Spelling 
Grammar 
Spe'ling 


Read. 


Read. 


Grammar    Read.        Spell.        Spell 


Read. 


Play 
Play 

***** 
***        Number 
Spell, 
"      Hand  Wk. 


Spelling 


Hand  Wk 


7  Suggestive  program  for  afternoon  of  a  ore  room  school, 


1:00 
1:10 
1:20 
1:30 
1:40 
1:50 
2:05 
220 


All  General  exercises 

1  Primary  Work 

2  Reading 

3  Reading 

5    Geography 

All  writing  or  draw. 

7    Geog  aphy 

5    Spelling 


7  th 

*** 

Geog. 


***** 

*** 

History 


Geog. 


3rd 
*** 

Read. 


Read 

*** 


¥anguage 


Reading 

**» 

Reading 


Language 
Hand  work 


*ft* 
Reading 


Play 
Play 


2:30    Recess 


2:45    15    1-2    language  and 

Nature  Study 
3:00    15    7     History  and  Civics 
3Jl5    15    3       Language      and 

Nature  Study 
3:30    15    3      Language       and 

Nature  Study 
3:45    15    7     Physiology 


History 

*** 


Physiology 


Physiology 

*** 


Language 


***** 
Hand  work 


Language 


Language 
Hand  work 


Language 


Hand  work 


Draw 
Hand  work 


O)  Provides  a  stimulus  for  reviewing  and  organizing  the 
materials  which  have  heen  taught  during  the  term  or 
year.  If  we  wish  these  materials  to  be  remembered  and 
recalled,  we  must  organize  them  in  a  logical  way. 

(2)  An  examination  is  an  excellent  review  exercise.  Every 
repetition   adds   to   the   stability   and   worth   of   the   facts 


32  ttiLONOIS  STATS  QUJfcgTlO<N  BOOK, 

and  principles  repeated,  especially  when  we  not  only  re- 
peat but  organize  our  knowledge. 

(3)  Tlie  examination  is  of  value  as  a  test  of  the  efficiency 
of  the  teaching. 

(4)  The  examination  may  be  looked  upon  by  the  pupil  as 
a  partial  test  of  his  efficiency  in  school  work. 

The  disadvantages  of  an  examination  system  may  be  coun- 
teracted in  part  by 

(1)  Having  the  examinations  preceded  by  thorogoing  re- 
views. 

(2)  By  giving  the  formal  examinations  only  at  the  close  of 
the  term,  but  giving  informal  tests  thruout  the  term. 

(3)  By  giving  such  questions  as  will  require  ability  to  ap- 
ply and  use  facts  and  principles  in  new  ways. 

(4)  By  exercising  great  care  that  nervous  pupils  be  not  un- 
duly worried  over  the  examinations. 

(5)  By  requiring  all  pupils  regardless  of  the  quality  of  their 
monthly  work  to  take  the  examinations. 

Patron's  Day  is  a  day  formally  set  apart  for  the  exhibition 
to  parents  and  school  patrons  of  the  work  of  the  school. 

The  observance  of  Patron's  Day  helps  to  acquaint  the  parents 
with  the  kind  of  work  that  is  done  in  school,  helps  to 
bring  them  into  closer  sympathy  with  the  school,  en- 
ables the  teacher  to  get  the  parents'  point  of  view  on 
school  matters,  and  enables  the  teacher  to  set  forth  to 
the  parents  the  needs  of  the  school. 

9.  The  sources  of  reading  material  for  beginners  as  suggested 
in  our  State  Course  are  as  follows: 

1.  Room-management. 

2.  Games  and  plays. 

3.  Stories  given  to  children  in  literature. 

4.  Nature-study. 

10.  (1)    Choose  for  class  exercise  in  spelling  only  such  words 

as  are  (a)  somewhat  familiar  to  almost  all  pupils  in  the 
class  (b)  in  common  use  (c)  have  orthographic  difficul- 
ties. Do  not  waste  time  on  words  that  pupils  know  and 
know  well. 

(2)  To  learn  spelling  in  the  most  economical  way  use  the 
sense  of  sight,  the  muscular  sense  and  the  sense  of  hear- 
ing. 

(3)  Depend  mainly  on  written  spelling  which  employs  the 
sense  of  sight  and  at  the  same  time  the  muscular  sense. 
Review  by  spelling  orally. 

(4)  Words  misspelled  in  writing  should  be  written  several 
times  on  a  number  of  different  days. 

(5)  Lead  pupils  to  form  the  habit  of  studying  carefully  all 
new  words  as  they  come  to  them  in  all  their  lessons  and 
in  their  general  reading. 

11.  Review  of  notation  and  numeration,  review  of  fundament- 
al processes  of  addition,  subtraction,  multiplication  and  division, 
review  of  fractions,  denominate  numbers,  percentage. 

12.  King  Midas;  Elves  and  Shoemaker;  The  Valiant  Black- 
bird; One  Bye,  Two  Eyes,  Three  Eyesr  Why  the  Sea  is  Salt. 


XLiUHOlS  STA¥S  QOEilTlON  BOOK,  33 

(1)  Read  entire  story  to  children  (2)  read  again,  part  each 
day  commenting  on  story  as  you  go  along,  permitting 
children  to  ask  questions,  having  them  repeat  parts  of  it. 
Then  have  some  pupil  tell  entire  story,  at  first  perhaps 
with  teacher's  help.     Finally  dramatize  the  story. 

Aims  in  teaching  phonics  are: 

(1)  To  give  the  child  a  real  mastery  of  the  printed  page 
(2)  to  make  him  as  independent  as  possible  in  his  read- 
ing (3)  to  help  him  to  grow  steadily  in  his  ability  to  help 
himself  (4)  to  lead  to  clear  enunciation.  For  plan  for 
teaching  phonics,  see  page  25,  State  Course  of  Study. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. — Answers. 

By   O.   C.   Bailey,   Superintendent  of   Schools, 
Effingham,   Illinois. 


1.  al  ly',  cer'  e  brum,  dis  course',  i  de'  a,  in'  dus  try,  in'  quir  y, 
gon'  do  la,  ho  ri'  zon,  re  cess',  for'  mi  da  ble. 

2.  gratis,    deaf   or   deaf,   arid,   piano,   water,   chasten   ,produet, 

forehead,    bouquet. 

w  A  A  ^ 

3.  whey,  meat,  fern,  debt,  heir,  church,  human,  rule,  pull,  cup. 

4.  1.  ante,  before;  2.  anti,  opposite;  3.  an(te),  before;  pre,  be- 
fore; 5,  se,  aside;  6.  bene,  well  or  good;  7.  e,  out  of;  8.  ob(of), 
against;    9.  im,  on;    10.  im,  in,  into,  on,  not. 

5.  (a)  beginning,  benefitted,  abhorrence,  merited,  stirring,  ac- 
quitted, conference,  galloped,  heaped,  occurrence. 

(b)  Monosyllables,  and  words  accented  on  the  last  syllable, 
ending  in  a  single  consonant,  preceded  by  a  single  vowel,  double 
the  final  consonant  on  receiving  a  suffix  beginning  with  a  vowel 
sound.     Exceptions  are  "ce"  and  "ge"  before  "able". 

6.  vene,  to  come;  plus,  further;  sequi,  to  follow;  credere,  to 
believe;  doto,  given;  norma,  a  rule,  regular;  cogno,  to  know;  gradi, 
to  step;  cado,  to  fall;  fortis,  strong. 

7.  intercedes  (inters between,  cedere  =  to  go),  to  go  between; 

to  pass  between;   to  interpose, 
dissect  =  (dis  =  apart,  secare  =  to  cut),  to  cut  into  pieces;   to 

divide, 
bisect  =  (bi  =  two,  sectus  =  to  cut),  to  cut  or  divide  into  two 

parts, 
persecutes  (per  =  after,  sequi  =  to   follow)  =  to  follow  after; 

to   pursue   for   the   purpose   of   inflicting   injury;    to   ha- 
rass, 
expires  (ex  =  out,  spirare  =  to  breathe)  =  to  breathe  out;  to 

emit  the  breath, 
admonish  =  (ad  =  to,   monere  =  warn ) ,  =  to  warn   of   a   fault; 

to  reprove  with  mildness. 


34  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

contaminate^  (con  =  together,    tangere  =  tp    touch)  rr  to    cor- 
rupt;   to    defile;    to    touch    together    things   that    are    not 
supposed  to  be  together, 
circumvent^  (circum  =  around,    veno  =  to    come),  =  to    gain 
advantage  over  by  stategy;   to  impose  upon. 


PEDAGOGY — Answers. 
By   L.   P.   Frohardt,  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Granite  City,    III. 


1.  The  first  day  at  school  is  a  very  important  one  because  first 
impressions,  which  are  the  most  lasting,  are  then  formed.  If  the 
teacher  makes  a  good  impression  the  first  day  it  will  save  her  many 
a  useless  annoyance,  but  if  the  start  is  poor  because  the  teacher 
lacks  self-control  or  does  not  display  good  tact  and  act  with  preci- 
sion matters  soon  get  into  a  chaotic  state  and  it  will  be  hard  to 
establish  regular  routine  and  inaugurate  good  systematic  work.  The 
teacher  should  come  well  prepared  and  equipped  for  the  first  day  by 
having  well  laid  plans  worked  out  and  all  the  necessary  supplies  and 
materials  on  hand  to  start  off  with  a  full  day's  work  the  first  day. 

2.  The  assignment  of  a  lesson  is  one  of  the  most  important  parts 
of  a  text-book  lesson.  The  assignment  should  be  definite  and  clear 
so  that  the  pupil  knows  just  what  is  expected  of  him  and  that  he 
has  also  the  necessary  assistance  from  the  teacher  to  understand 
difficult  words  or  passages  and  have  any  insuperable  difficulties  re- 
moved. Caution  should  also  be  exercised  not  to  make  the  work  too 
easy  for  the  pupil.  The  latter  must  be  held  responsible  for  a  definite 
amount  of  work  done  by  himself  so  that  he  may  be  ultimately  led 
to  become  independent  of  the  teacher  in  working  out  an  assignment 
or  any  problem. 

It  should  further  arouse  an  interest  in  the  subject  matter  of 
the  text  and  furnish  him  a  motive  for  an  aggressive  attack. 

3.  A  teacher  may,  (1)  in  most  of  the  northern  states,  compel  a 
pupil  by  law  to  attend;  (2)  the  teacher  may  use  rewards  or  penalties 
or  both.  Rewards  may  be  in  the  form  of  prizes,  immunities  or 
privileges.  Prizes  may  be  material,  as  little  gifts  or  tokens  when 
certain  standards  have  been  reached,  or  immaterial  prizes,  such  as  a 
certificate  of  honor,  special  rank  in  class,  special  seats,  honor  roll, 
publishing  of  names  in  papers,  etc.  All  these  devices  may  be  bene- 
ficial and  helpful  if  properly  managed,  but  attendance  should  never 
be  enforced  or  secured  beyond  a  certain  limit.  Health  should  never 
be  endangered  to  secure  a   high   standard  of  attendance. 

4.  Bad  posture  in  sitting  and  standing  or  awkward,  clumsy  or 
slovenly  walking  may  lead  to  malformations  of  body  and  ill  health 
or  result  in  careless  and  slovenly  habits  of  life  which  may  end  in 
bad  conduct  and  character. 

We  may  help  them  best  by  setting  a  good  example  before  them 
ourselves  and  be  ever  on  our  guard  to  correct  promptly  any  bad 
sitting  or  standing  position,  or  awkward  walking  before  habits  have 
become  fixed. 

5.  Bad  habits  can  best  be  broken  up  by  constant  vigilance  to 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  35 

see  that  they  are  corrected  and  new  and  correct  ones  are  estab- 
lished in  the  place  of  the  wrong  ones. 

C.  The  best  and  most  economic  way  to  memorize  is  to  be  placed 
in  suitable  environment,  one  free  from  strange  noise,  rapid  move- 
ments, or  anything  that  may  dissipate  the  mind  and  keep  it  from 
focalizing  itself  upon  that  which  is  to  be  memorized,  immediately  cor- 
recting any  errors  that  may  creep  in,  especially  in  the  earlier  stages 
of  committing  anything,  is  an  essential  condition.  This  is  impera- 
tive since  an  error  allowed  to  be  repeated  is  harder  to  get  rid  of 
than  to  learn  something  new  in  the  first  instance.  Therefore  constant 
conscious  repetition  without  exception  till  the  matter  is  firmly  fast- 
ened in  the  mind  will  be  the  quickest  way  to  memorize  anything. 

7.  The  following  items  must  be  considered  in  making  a  program: 
(a)  Length  of  school-term;  (b)  number  of  school  hours  during  the 
day;  (c)  number  of  subjects  to  be  required;  (d)  time  devoted  to 
recess  and  intermissions;  (e)  relative  importance  of  subjects  at  differ- 
ent levels  of  child's  development;  (f)  relation  of  different  types  of 
subject-matter  to  fatigue;  (g)  number  of  pupils  in  the  different 
classes;    (h)  time  devoted  to  exercises  of  all  kinds. 

8.  Attention  is  the  focalization  of  the  mind  upon  the  subject  be- 
fore us.  The  sun's  rays  in  passing  thru  a  lens  fall  upon  a  paper  without 
any  apparent  effect  until  the  rays  are  focalized  to  a  small  spot,  and 
then  a  hole  is  burned.  So  it  is  with  the  mind,  its  powers,  figuratively 
speaking,  must  be  brought  to  the  burning  point. 

A  child  can  give  good  attention  only  when  no  distracting  noise, 
strange  sounds  of  any  kind  or  rapid  and  unusual  movements  are 
permitted. 

9.  Drills  may  be  physical  or  mental.  Physical  drills  are  for 
the  purpose  of  automatizing  certain  muscular  movements;  mental 
drills  are  for  the  purpose  of  fastening  permanently  in  the  mind  cer- 
tain facts,  forms,  precepts,  or  principles. 

Two  things  are  necessary  in  a  good  drill,  viz.:  (1)  Focalization 
of  mind  or  consciousness  upon  the  process;  (2)  constant  repetition 
upon  the  process,  permitting  no  exception  till  automatism  results. 

A  good  drill  in  arithmetic,  say  upon  a  multiplication  table,  would 
be  first  the  mastery  of  the  correct  combination,  as  3X9  is  27,  not  28, 
26  or  any  other  result  except  the  correct  one.  Then  repetition  of  this 
combination  several  times,  changing  the  order,  as  3X9,  three  nines, 
nine  times  3,  nine  threes,  etc.  Go  over  other  familiar  combinations  rap- 
idly bringing  in  the  combination  to  be  mastered,  till  it  comes  as 
easy  and  natural  as  any  other  known  combination. 

The  focalization  of  consciousness  upon  any  combination,  word 
or  process  is  absolutely  essential  at  first,  but  the  act  should  be 
repeated  till  it  becomes  automatic. 

10.  Some  of  the  advantages  of  departmental  work  immediately 
below  the  high  school  is  that  the  work  can  be  placed  in  the  hands  of 
teachers  who  have  a  special  aptitude,  special  training  or  fitness 
for  some  subjects  and  can  be  so  assigned  that  the  best  trained 
and  equipped  teachers  are  in  charge  of  the  work.  This  cannot  so 
well  be  done  when  each   teacher  teaches   all   the_  ordinary  subjects. 

In  the  departmental  plan  teachers  usually  have  only  to  look  after 
the  instruction  of  the  pupils'  of  the  class  as  no  other  pupils  are  in 


56  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

the  room  at  the  time  of  the  class  instruction,  which  is  an  advantage 
feoth  for  the  teacher  and  the  pupils  who  would  have  to  sit  and  study 
while  a  recitation  on  another  subject  is  conducted  in  their  pres- 
ence, and  their  minds  cannot  so  well  be  fastened  on  the  lesson  to 
be  studied,  nor  can  the  teacher's  whole  mind  be  on  her  class  in- 
struction while  she  must  have  her  mind  partly  on  the  other  pupils 
in  her  room. 

Some  of  the  disadvantages  are  the  lack  of  that  intimate  rela- 
tionship and  sympathy  that  springs  up  between  teacher  and  pupils 
in  a  school  room  when  the  same  teacher  and  the  same  pupils  are 
together  in  the  same  room  for  time.  Pupils  can  say,  this  is  my  teach- 
er, not  one  of  my  teachers,  and  the  teacher  can  say  and  feel  these 
are  my  pupils.  This  closer  acquaintanceship  and  sympathy  cannot 
be  established  between  teacher  and  pupils  in  the  departmental  plan. 
The  life  influence  of  a  teacher  over  her  pupils,  which  is  a  vital  factor 
in  all  education,  especially  in  the  moulding  of  character,  can  not  be 
made  so  potent  in  the  departmental  teaching  where  the  teacher 
comes  in  contact  with  so  many  different  ones  none  of  whom  she  can 
so  thoroly  understand  and  take  such  deep  personal  interest  in. 

11.  Difficulties  in  high  school  management:  (1)  Tardiness  is 
usually  much  greater  in  the  high  school  than  in  the  grades,  as  high 
school  students'  services  at  home  or  at  some  shop  or  business  house 
are  much  more  in  demand.  There  is  also  an  air  of  independence  and 
indifference  at  times  in  high  school  pupils  not  found  in  grade  pupils. 

Tardiness  may  be  overcome  by  making  the  opening  exercises  of 
such  general  and  intense  interest  that  pupils  feel  they  cannot  afford 
to  miss  them.  If  this  will  not  prove  sufficient  for  some,  more  dras- 
tic measures  may  have  to  be  adopted.  Non  admission  to  classes 
unless  by  a  special  permit  from  principal  or  superintendent  or  both, 
which  involves  considerable  inconvenience  and  embarrassment  to  the 
pupil  may  prove  effectual.  In  some  cases  special  work  imposed  and 
time  to  be  more  than  made  up  after  school  hours  may  prove  effec- 
tual. (2)  Cheating  in  examination.  This  may  be  cured  by  raising 
the  general  standard  and  sense  of  honor.  Close  vigilance  while  ex- 
aminations are  carried  on  and  a  total  failure  of  any  one  who  is  guilty 
of  any  dishonesty  are  usually  effectual  remedies.  (3)  Too  great  at- 
traction toward  one  another  on  the  part  of  some  of  the  students  of 
opposite  sexes.  Encouraging  the  mingling  of  the  sexes  under  proper 
guidance  and  restraints  in  social  events  will  tend  rather  to  prevent 
than  increase  undue  intimacy.  Too  great  propinquity  without  re- 
straint is  to  be  guarded  against.  If  any  two  show  an  undue  interest 
in  each  other  they  should  be  kept  at  a  distance  from  each  other  by 
being  seated  in  opposite  parts  of  the  assembly  or  study  room  and 
prevented  form  mingling  too  freely  during,  after,  and  before  school 
sessions  while  on  the  school  premises  or  in  the  school  building. 

12.  Young  people  in  the  high  school  should  not  be  required  to 
follow  every  little  detail  of  routine  in  the  same  manner  as  is  generally 
done  in  the  grades,  such  as  passing  to  and  from  their  rooms,  to  their 
seats,  sitting  or  standing  in  class,  etc.  This  does  not  mean  that  high 
school  students  should  be  absolutely  exempt  from  every  phase  of  or- 
derly routine,  but  it  should  be  more  of  a  general  nature.  They  should 
have  greater  opportunity  to  exercise  their  own   .judgment,   be  en- 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  37 

trusted  with  a  greater  responsibility  of  eelf  govenment,  exercise  their 
own  individuality. 

The  period  of  adolescence  needs  a  wider  scope  and  range  of  free- 
dom. They  should  be  put  largely  on  their  own  sense  of  honor,  treated 
more  nearly  like  adults,  and  should  be  encouraged  to  act  more  on 
their  initiative.  They  should  be  carefully  guided  and  not  so  much 
guarded  in  their  actions. 


ELEMENTARY  SCIENCE. 

By  Roy  M.  Sallee,  Galesburg,  111. 

Formerly  Assistant  in  Biology,  Western  Illinois  State 

Normal  School. 

1.  (a)   Wind:    (Illustrations).     Thistle,  dandelion,  elm,  linden, 

milkweed,  etc. 

(b)  Animals:  (Illustrations.)  Squirrels  burying  nuts  which 
are  never  used. 

Birds  dropping  fruit  seeds  along  fences  or  under  trees. 

(c)  Special  Structures:  Cockleburs,  sandburs  and  beggars' 
lice  have  hooks  to  catch  in  the  fur  of  animals,  or  the 
clothing  of  people. 

2.  (a)      (1)   Cocklebur.  (4)  Pig  weed. 

(2)  Wild  morning  glory.       (5)  Smart  weed. 
(3))  Wild  mustard, 
(b)  Some  of  the  qualities  which  fit  plants  to  thrive  in  culti- 
vated fields  are: 

1.  Strength  or  vitality. 

2.  The  habit  of  seeding  after  cultivation  has  ceased. 

3.  Ability  to  grow  and  produce  seeds  under  unfavor- 

able conditions. 

3.  Five  Serious  Insect  Pests,  and  methods  of  fighting  them. 

(1)  White  grub  or  grub  worm. — Allow  hogs  that  have  not 
had  rings  placed  in  their  noses  to  run  in  the  field  and 
root  freely. 

(2)  Corn  root  worm. — Do  not  allow  field  to  remain  in  corn 
for  more  than  two  successive  years. 

(3)  Chinch  Bug. — Keep  fields  free  from  rubbish.  Burn 
weeds  and  grasses  in  April  just  after  the  bugs  have  come 
out  of  their  winter  hiding  places.  If  the  bugs  are  very 
bad  stop  wheat  growing  for  a  few  years. 

To  prevent  bugs  from  going  from  wheat  fields  to  the  corn 
fields  surround  wheat  field  with  a  dust  strip  one  yard 
wide.      (Do  this  by  plowing  and  pulverizing.) 

(4)  Cutworms. — Break  sod  preceding  year.  If  replanting  is 
necessary  replant  as  late  as  possible. 

(5)  San  Jose  Scale. — Spray  with  a  Lime-Sulphur  Mixture. 
(Formula  should  be  taken  from  Agricultural  Text  Books, 
or  from  State  Experiment  Station  Bulletins.) 

4.  Our  Common  birds  may  be  divided  into  the  following  classes 
taking  into  consideration  the  time  they  spend  in  a  given  locality. 

1.  Permanent  residents.  3.  Winter  residents. 

2.  StimmerYesrdents.  4.  Migrating  Visitors. 


38  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION   BOOK. 

5.  (a)  Three  varieties  of  corn  commonly  grown  in  Illinois: 

1.  Keid's  Yellow  Dent.  3.  Learning. 

2.  Johnson  County   White. 

(b)  Selection  and  Care  of  Seed  Corn: 

Select  seed  corn  in  the  field  just  before  heavy  frosts.  Take 

ears  from  healthy  looking  stalks  which  have  grown  under 

ordinary  field  conditions.     Ears  should  not  be  taken  from 

very  tall  or  very  short  stalks. 

Alter  the  selection  of  the  ears  they  should  be  placed  in  a 

cool  dry  shed  either  on  shelves  or  on  hangers. 

A  severe  freeze  weakens  the  germ  in   the  seed.     During 

very  cold  periods  keep  a  small  fire  in  the  store  room. 

6.  (a)    When  air   is   heated   it  expands.     This  warm   expanded 

air  is  lighter  than  the  colder  air  which  is  outside  the  stove 
or  furnace.  The  colder  heavier  air  pushes  into  the  fur- 
nace or  stove  and  forces  the  warm  expanded  air  upward. 
This  cool  air  becomes  warmed,  and  expanded,  and  is  then 
forced  upward  by  the  colder  heavier  air. 
(b)  When  a  damper  on  a  stove  or  a  furnace  is  closed  the 
warm  air  cannot  pass  away  so  rapidly.  This  also  prevents 
the  cold  air  from  pouring  thru  the  stove  or  furnace  so 
rapidly.  The  fire  is  then  checked  because  the  air  is  not 
fanning  it  so  much. 

7.  (a)   Two  different  methods  by  which  certain  plants  are  able 

to  climb: 

(1)    By  twining.  (2)  By  tendrils  or  hold  fasts, 

(b)  The  climbing  plants  are  able  to  reach  upward  a  long 
ways  in  order  to  get  to  the  sunlight.  Because  of  this, 
climbing  plants  can  grow  where  they  could  not  were  it 
not  for  this  habit. 

The  main  disadvantage  is  the  long  distance  which  the  wa- 
ter must  be  carried  before  the  leaves  of  the  plant  can  use 
it  to  manufacture  food  materials. 

8.  (a)   A  biennial  plant  is  a  plant  which  lives  but  two  years. 

During  the  first  year  it  stores  up  food  which  it  uses  in 
seed  production  during  the  second  year, 
(b)   Three  biennial  garden  plants: 

1.  Cabbage.  3.  Parsnips. 

2.  Turnips. 

9.  Weather  record  facts  to  be  noted  and  recorded: 

1.  Temperature.  3.  Strength  of  wind. 

2.  Direction  of  wind.  Strong 

Calm 
Weak 

4.  Condition  of  Atmosphere. 
Cloudy.  Overcast.  Clear. 

5.  Form  of  Precipitation. 

Rain.  '  Hail 

Snow  Sleet 

*  .6    Amount  of  Precipitation.       ■   j '  ■•      , 

Much  Little'  None' 

If  a  rain  guase  is  available  state  amount  i'1   inches.. 
7.  Barometer  Reading. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  39 

10.  Cuttings  of  begonias  or  geraniums  may  be  made  by  breaking 
off  one. of  the  smaller  branches,  removing  most  of  the  leaves  from 
this  branch  and  then  planting  the  branch  in  moist  sand.  It  is  often 
advisable  to  turn  a  common  glass  upside  down  over  the  plant  for 
a  few  days.     This  saves  the  moisture  which  is  in  the  plant. 

Sweet  potatoes  are  propagated  usually  by  planting  a  few  whole 
sweet  potatoes  in  a  hot  bed.  A  number  of  sprouts  will  soon  come 
thru  the  ground.  As  soon  as  these  sprouts  are  about  three  inches 
in  length  they  are  pulled  up  and  set  out. 

These  sprouts  are  the  commercial  sweet  potato  plants.  Some- 
times three  or  more  sets  of  plants  may  be  obtained  from  the  one 
sweet  potato.  As  soon  as  one  set  is  pulled  another  one  sprouts. 
This  continues  until  the  stored  food  materials  in  the  potato  are 
exhausted. 

"  Sweet  potatoes  may  also  be  propagated  in  the  same  manner  as 
common  potatoes,  viz.,  by  cutting  the  potato  in  pieces  and  planting 
the  pieces. 


PHYSIOLOGY. — Answers. 

By   H.   T.   White,   Superintendent  of   Schools, 
Carlinville,  Illinois. 


1.  The  four  main  classes  of  foods  are  minerals  (water  and 
mineral  salts),  proteids,  fats,  and  carbohydrates.  All  these  except 
either  carbohydrates  or  fats  are  indispensible  in  our  diet. 

2.  Most  of  our  food  must  be  softened  and  made  into  liquid 
form  before  it  can  enter  the  blood.  This  change  is  brought  about 
by  the  operations  of  chewing,  softening,  dissolving,  and  otherwise 
changing  the  food  so  as  to  fit  it  to  pass  thru  the  cell  walls  into  the 
blood  vessels.  These  operations  constitute  the  process  called  di- 
gestion. 

3.  The  blood  has  four  uses:  it  regulates  the  temperature  of 
the  body,  takes  food  to  the  tissues,  takes  oxygen  to  the  tissues, 
and  brings  waste  matter  from  all  parts  of  the  body,  thus  ridding 
the  body  of  its  poison. 

4.  Pure  air,  as  it  is  taken  into  the  lungs,  contains  in  every  10,- 
000  parts,  approximately  four  parts  of  carbon  dioxide.  2,000  parts 
of  oxygen,  and  8,0000  parts  of  nitrogen.  When  it  comes  from  the 
lungs  it.  contains  approximately  40  0  parts  of  carbon  dioxide,  1600 
parts  of  oxygen,  and  8,000  parts  of  nitrogen. 

Blood  that  is  just  entering  the  lungs  is  laden  with  carbon  di- 
oxide which  gets  out  of  the  blood  thru  the  thin  walls  of  the  lung 
cells  into  the  lung  cells.  While  this  is  going  on  fresh  oxygen  is  go- 
ring, from  the  lung  cell  thru  its  thin  walls  into  the  blood,  hence 
'blood  just  leaving  the  lungs  is  laden  with  oxygen. 
••  5.  Water;  from  shallow  wells  is  likely  to  be  contaminated. 
Many  'shallow,  wells  are  .polluted  by  refuse  from,  stables,  and  by 
other  filth.  Shallow  wells  are  easy  receptacles  for  disease  germs, 
especially  typhoid   germs. 


40  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

Common  drinking  cups  are  very  risky  because  disease  germs  are 
left  on  them  by  some  mouths  and  then  are  taken  from  the  cups 
into  other  people's  mouths. 

6.  In  a  well  heated  room  the  heat  is  as  evenly  distributed  as 
possible.  The  temperature  in  a  room  where  people  are  sitting 
quiet  should  be  about  twenty  degrees  centigrade  or  sixty-eight  de- 
grees Fahrenheit.  The  air  should  be  kept  moist  by  a  pan  of  water 
on  the  stove  or  register. 

7.  School  desks  and  seats  should  be  high  enough  so  that  pupils 
will  not  feel  cramped  and  yet  not  so  high  that  their  feet  do  not 
reach  the  floor  while  they  are  sitting.  Pupils  should  train  them- 
selves to  sit  erect. 

8.  Regular  exercise  out  of  doors  if  possible,  or  at  least  in  an 
atmosphere  of  fresh  air,  tends  to  keep  the  body  in  a  healthy  state. 
It  aids  in  purifying  the  blood  thru  deep  respiration.  It  gives 
tone  to  the  muscles  and  the  nerves.  It  helps  the  lymphatic  circu- 
lation as  well  as  blood  circulation. 

9.  Secretions  are  for  use  in  the  system  e.  g.,  saliva  and  gastric 
juice  are  made  to  help  digest  our  food.  Excretions  are  made  for 
the  purpose  of  getting  rid  of  the  waste,  that  which  is  of  no  further 
use  to  the  body.  The  kidneys  and  the  skin  are  the  chief  excretory 
organs  of  the  body. 

10.  To  prevent  taking  cold  when  your  clothing  becomes  damp 
or  your  feet  wet,  keep  moving  until  there  is  an  opportunity  to  put 
on  dry  clothing  and  dry  shoes  and  stockings.  Never  sit  still  in  a 
room  where  the  air  is  cold  enough  to  make  you  chill,  move  about 
until  the  temperature   is  brought  up  to  68  degrees  F. 

11.  Only  about  twenty  different  kinds  of  bacteria  produce 
disease  in  man.  Diseases  caused  by  germs  are  known  as  infec- 
tious diseases  because  the  germ  infects  or  makes  its  way  into  the 
body.  Bacillus  tuberculosis  causes  consumption,  scrofula,  and 
white  swelling.  The  diphtheria  bacilli,  growing  in  the  throat,  pro- 
duce diphtheria.  Pneumonia,  sore  throat,  and  colds  occur  when 
certain  bacteria  are  present  in  great  numbers.  They  may  find 
entrance  thru  the  alimentary  canal,  the  lungs,  or  the  skin.  Germs 
like  those  of  tuberculosis  and  typhoid  fever  may  reach  the  intes- 
tines with  food  or  water,  and  penetrate  the  cells  there,  and  even 
pass  thru  the  walls  of  the  intestine  into  the  blood  to  be  carried  to 
any  part  of  the  body." — Human  Body  and  Health,  Davidson,  page 
50. 

12.  When  the  hand  touches  a  very  hot  object  the  sensory 
nerves  carry  the  message  to  the  spinal  cord  which  sends  baek  to 
the  hand  thru  a  motor  nerve  the  reply,  "Take  it  off."  All  this 
happens  within  one-twentieth  of  a  second,  and  the  hand  is  re- 
moved even  before  the  brain  is  aware  of  what  has  happened.  This 
power  of  the  spinal  cord  over  muscular  movements  is  called  re- 
flex action. 

13.  The  windows  of  a  school  room  should  be  grouped  in  the 
rear  half  or  two-thirds  of  the  wall  at  the  left  of  the  pupils.  Each 
window  should  extend  as  near  to  the  ceiHng  as  possible.  It  should 
not  extend  lower  than  the  tops  of  the  pupils*  beads  while  they  are 
seated.    The  window  space  should  he  at  least  one-ffth  of  the  entire 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  41 

floor  area  of  the  room.  Shades  should  be  arranged  so  that  direct 
sunlight  will  not  fall  upon  the  books  nor  upon  written  work  on  the 
blackboard.  If  possible,  every  school  room  should  be  supplied 
with  artificial  lights,  preferably  electricity,  to  supplement  sunlight 
on  gloomy  days. 

14.  "Fainting  may  be  caused  by  pain,  fatigue,  loss  of  blood, 
the  sight  of  some  gruesome  object,  such  as  flowing  blood,  or  by  a 
hot  and  badly  ventilated  room.  The  face  is  pale,  the  lips  white, 
and  the  breathing  is  quickened,  while  cold  sweat  appears  on  the 
brow  and  the  palms  of  the  hands.  As  fainting  is  caused  by  in- 
sufficient supply  of  blood  to  the  brain,  the  patient  should  be  laid 
flat  on  the  floor.  Then  the  doors  and  windows  must  be  opened 
and  the  clothing  loosened,  while  cold  water  is  sprinkled  on  the 
face.  Recovery  should  occur  in  a  few  minutes.  As  soon  as  the 
patient  is  able  to  swallow  give  sip3  of  hot  milk  or  water.  Swal- 
lowing stimulates  the  heart.  Do  not  give  alcohol." — Human  Body 
and  Health,  Davidson,  page  294. 


PENMANSHIP. — Answers. 

By  O.  C.  Bailey,  Superintendent  of  Schools, 
Effingham,  Illinois. 


1.  (a)  The  body  should  be  placed  before  the  desk,  in  a  half 
right  position,  (this  is  the  better  position,  because  in  the 
average  school  room  there  is  not  room  for  the  front  po- 
sition), about  two  inches  from  the  edge  of  the  desk,  and 
in  an  upright  position. 

The  feet  should  rest  firmly  and  flatly  on  the  floor. 
The  right  elbow   should   rest   on   the   lower   right  corner 
of  the  desk,  and  the  arm  extended  across  the  desk  at  an 
angle  of   40   degrees.     The  left  hand  rests  on  the  paper 
in  front  of  the  right  hand  and  at  right  angles  to  it. 
(b)    Hold  the  pen  between  the  first  and  second  fingers  and 
the   thumb.      The   first   finger  bends   naturally   and   rests 
on  the  top  of  the  holder,  about  one  inch  from  the  point 
of  the  pen.     The  pen  holder  rests  on  the  second  finger, 
crossing  it  near  the  root  of  the  nail.     The  thumb  rests 
on  the  holder  nearly  opposite  the  first  joint  of  the  first 
finger.     The  third  and  fourth  fingers  are  bent,  resting  on 
the  paper  and  forming  a  movable  rest.   (Palmer  Method). 
2      The  state  course  of  study,  in  the  suggested  program  on  pa- 
ges 10  and  11,  provides  for  but  one  period  of  writing  daily  in  a  ru- 
ral school.     The  period  is  15  minutes,  and  all  write  at  this  time. 

Primary  pupils  should  have  a  part  of  the  time  at  the  board. 
Give  them  the  first  seven  and  one- half  minutes  at  the  board;  the 
balance  of  the  fifteen  minutes  at  their  seats.  Primary  pupils 
should  always  have  a  writing  period  at  the  board  followed  by  one 
at  the  seat,  to  keep  them  from  forming  the  habit  of  the  full  arm 
movement, 


42  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

In  view  of  the  fact  that  the  rural  school  program  is  always  in 
a  crowded  condition,  I  would  say  that  the  above  is  the  best  ar- 
rangement. 

3.     Young  children  are  asked  to  write  larger,  in  order, 

(1)  To  give  them  a  freer  movement; 

(2)  To  avoid  the  tendency  to  use  the  fingers; 

(3)  To  avoid  cramped  work. 

Copy  books  should  not  be  used.  After  the  first  few  lines  are 
written,  the  pupil  ceases  to  refer  to  the  copy  and  makes  a  copy  of 
his  own.  Copies  are  necessary,  however,  and  a  movable  manual 
is  much  better.  The  pupil  can  move  this  down  and  with  it  cover 
up  his  work. 

4.  Effingham,  111.,  July  26,   1914. 

Board  of  Education, 

Effingham,  Illinois, 
Gentlemen: 

Please  consider  me  an  applicant  for  the  position  of  teacher 
in  the  Third  Grade  of  your  schools. 

Inclosed  find  testimonials  concerning  my  character,  education, 
and  success  in  former  positions. 

For  additional  testimonials  I  would  like  to  refer  you  to  Supt. 
J.  W.  Davis,  Effingham,  111.,  and  Pres.  L.  C.  Lord,  E.  I.  S.  N„ 
Charleston,  111. 

Thanking  you  for  the  courtesy  of  a  hearing,  I  am, 
Yours  truly, 

(Miss)  Effie  St.  Clair, 

Effingham,  Illinois. 

5.  Calls  for  applicant's  own  writing. 

6.  (a)   The  finger  movement  is  the  so-called  movement  of  the 

fingers;   an  upward  and  downward  movement.     It  should 
be  little  used. 

(b)  The  forearm  movement  is  the  real  movement  in  writing. 
It  is  called  muscular  movement,  because  it  is  controlled 
by  the  muscles  of  the  forearm.  The  arm  rests  upon  the 
muscles  of  the  forearm,  and  moves  upon  these  muscles, 
the  fingers  being  held  in  a  natural  and  easy  manner,  and 
the  letters  being  formed  by  the  push  and  pull  of  this  mus- 
cle. 

(c)  The  combined  movement  is  a  combination  of  these  move- 
ments for  the  more  elaborate  work  of  the  pen  artist.  The 
fingers  are  moved  slightly  in  connection  with  the  move- 
ment of  the  muscles  to  give  peculiar  shading. 

(d)  Primary,  intermediate,  and  grammar  grade  pupils  can 
and  should  be  taught  the  muscular  movement.  It  is 
logical,  easily  learned,  and  is  less  exhausting  than  any 
other  movement. 

7.  (a)      The  Muscular  movement. 

Place  the  arm  on  the  desk,  the  elbow  near  the  right  hand 
corner  of  the  desk,  the  arm  resting  on  the  muscle. 
Let  the  hand  rest  lightly  upon  the  third  and  fourth  fin- 
gers.      Move  the  hand  backward  and  forward  a  number 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  46 

of  times  to  get  the  movement  before  the  pen  touches  the 
paper. 

Drop  the  pen  to  the  paper  and  make  the  push  and  pull  ex- 
ercise, crossing  two  spaces. 

Then  make  the  oval  exercises  as  in  the  capital  letter  "O", 
also  crossing  two  spaces. 

Hold  the  fingers  in  natural  position,  and  without  gripping 
the  pen  holder.  Let  it  glide  smoothly  over  the  paper 
without  any  effort  from  the  lingers.  Do  not  \sork  the 
finger  joints. 


GRAMMAR. — Answers 

By  Miss  Myrtle  Gentry,  Instructor  in  Summer  School  State 
Normal  University  and  teacher  in  Wichita,  Kansas 


1.  The  words,  "a  little  old  man  with  a  long  beard  hobbling  to 
meet  them',  do  not  assert;  therefore  they  do  not  form  a  sentence. 
The  words,  "a  little  old  man  with  a  long  beard  hobbled  to  meet 
them,"  do  contain  an  asserting  element  in  the  verb  hobbled;  there- 
fore this  group  of  words  forms  a  sentence. 

2. 

Complete  Subject  Complete  Predicate 

(a)  you  are  who 

(b)  you  (understood)  think  on  these  things, 

if  there  be  any  virtue, 
if  there  be  any  praise. 

(c)  all  legislative  powers  shall  be  vested  in  a  Congress 
herein  granted  of  the  United  States,  which 

shall  consist  of  a  Senate 
and  a  House  of  Representatives 
3.      (a)    cities' 

The  plural  form  of  the  noun  city  is  cities. 

Plural  nouns  ending  in  s  make  the  possessive  form  by  the 

addition  of  the  apostrophe  only. 

(b)  knives. 

The  singular  form  of  this  noun  ends  in  fe.     It  forms  its 
plural  by  changing  the  fe  to  ves. 

(c)  feet. 

This  noun  changed  the  vowel  of  the  root  to  form  its  plu- 
ral. 

(d)  writing-desks. 

The  main  word  of  a  compound  word   is   generally   made 
plural.     The  word  desk  is  the  main  word. 

(e)  men-servants. 

Compounds    consisting    of    two    nouns    sometimes    inflect 
both  parts. 

(f)  mouthfuls. 

When  the  parts  have  become  so  united  that  the  word  hardly 
seems  a  compound  word,  the  tendency  is  to  make  the  last 
part  plural. 

(g)  gentlemen's. 


44  IkUNOIg  UTAtfa  QUESTION  BOOK. 

Plural  nouns  not  ending  in  s  make  the  possessive  form  by 
the  addition  of  the  apostrophe  and  s. 
(h)    brother-in-law's. 

Compound  nouns  form  the  possessive  by  adding  the  pos- 
sessive sign  to  the  last  word  of  the  compound. 
3.  (b)  Either  of  the  following  plurals  is  correct:  The  Misses  Jones 
or  The  Miss  Joneses.  In  like  manner,  either  of  the  following  plu- 
ral possessives  is  correct:  The  Misses  Jones'  or  The  Miss  Joneses' 
however,  the  phrase  of  the  Miss  Joneses,  or  of  the  Misses  Jones 
will  generally  prove  less  awkward.  Then,  according  to  the  general 
rule,  the  plural  possessive  of  alumnus  is  alumni's;  but  the  general 
custom  is  to  substitute  the  phrase  of  the  alumni  for  the  possessive 
form. 

lady — ladies'  alumnus 

house — houses'  state — states' 

4.  (a)   This  sentence  consists  of  two  independent  propositions. 

It  is  a  compound  sentence. 

(b)  This  sentence  consists  of  but  one  proposition.  It  is  a 
simple  sentence. 

(c)  This  sentence  contains  two  independent  propositions. 
Each  part  contains  also  a  dependent  clause.  The  sen- 
tence is  complex-compound. 

5.  Person  is  that  peculiarity  in  the  form  or  use  of  a  noun  or 
pronoun  that  shows  whether  it  represents  the  speaker,  the  one  or 
ones  spoken  to,  or  the  one  or  ones  spoken  of. 

In  most  languages,  person,  so  far  as  rules  are  concerned,  is  the 
inflection  of  a  verb  to  show  the  person  of  its  subject.  In  modern 
English  except  for  the  verb  be  there  remains  no  such  inflection 
except  in  the  third  person,  singular  number,  present  tense,  indica- 
tive mode.  We  simply  keep  on  talking  about  person  because  other 
languages  possess  this  inflection  and  English  once  did. 

A  personal  pronoun  is  a  pronoun  that  shows  by  its  form  whether 
it  represents  the  person  speaking,  the  one  spoken  to,  or  the  one 
spoken  of. 

Declension  of  the  Personal  Pronoun  of  the  Third  Person. 


Singular 

Plural 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

All  genders 

Nom. 

he 

she 

it 

they 

Poss. 

his 

her,  hers 

its 

their,   theirs 

Obj. 

him 

her 

it 

them 

6.  Subject.     That  Wilson  is  a  good  president  is  not  denied. 
Predicate  Attribute — My  belief  is  that  he  is  guilty. 
Object — I  have  heard  that  the  concert  has  been  postponed. 
Appositive — She   had   heard   the   saying,    "Birds   of   a   feather 

flock  together." 

7.  Present  Past  Past    Participle. 

lie  lay  lain 

lay  laid  laid 


iUMKQIS  STATS  ^4T£ilTlOH  BOOK.  45 

Synopsis  of  the  verb  lie  in  the  indicative  mode,  third  person,  and 
singular  number. 

Common  Form 
Pre*.  He  lies  Progressive  Form 

Past  He  lay  He  is  lying. 

Future       He  will  lie  He  was  lying 

Pres  Perf .  He  has  lain  He  will  be  lying 

Past  Perf.  He  had  lain  He  has  been  lying 

Fut.  Perf.  He  will  have  lain  He  had  been  lying 

He  will  have  been  lying 
Emphatic  Form 
He  does  lie 
He  did  lie 

Synopsis  of  the  verb  lay  in  the  indicative  mode,  first  person,  and 
plural  number. 

Common  Form  Progressive  Form 

Pres.  We  lay  We  are  laying 

Past  We  laid  We  were  laying 

Future        We  shall  lay  We  shall  be  laying 

Pres.  Perf.  We  have  laid  We  have  been  laying 

Past  Perf.  We  had  laid  We  had  been  laying 
Fut  Perf.  We  shall  have  laid        We  shall  have  been  laying. 

Emphatic  Form 
We  do  lay 

We  did  lay 
8.      (a)   Rules  for  punctuation  cannot  be  understood  without  a 
knowledge  of  sentence  analysis.     The  following   rule  il- 
lustrates this  fact: 

An  appositive,  a  purely  descriptive  adjective  clause,  an 
adverbial  clause,  out  of  its  natural  position,  and  a  nom- 
inative of  address  are  set  off  by  the  comma. 
The  parts  of  a  compound  element  are  separated  by  the 
comma  unless  all  the  conjunctions  are  expressed  or  unless 
the  parts  are  connected  in  pairs.  In  the  latter  case  the 
pairs  only  are  separated. 

The  parts  of  a  compound  sentence  are  separated  by  the 
comma,  even  tho  the  conjunctions  are  expressed,  un- 
less the  parts  are  long  and  contain  commas  within  them- 
selves. In  this  ease  the  parts  are  separated  by  the  semi- 
colon. 

A  prepositional  phrase  which  is  long  and  out  of  its  natural 
order  is  often  set  off  by  the  comma. 
Grammar  is  of  value  because  it  teaches  us: 

(1)  How  to  choose  correctly  between  the  inflected  forms  of 
words. 

(2)  how  to  frame  clear  and  well  constructed  sentences,  and 
(3)  how  to  get  at  the  thought  of  long  and  complicated  sen- 
tences that  we  meet  in  reading. 

Now  in  our  slightly  Inflected  English  language,  the  only  one 
of  all  the  points  given  in  parsing  that  is  of  any  great  help  to  us  in 
aay  of  these  ways  is  the  construction  of  the  word.  This  is  worth 
more  than  all  the  other  points  taken  together,  and  this  is  deter- 


46  ILLINOIS  STATE   QUESTION   BOOK. 

mined  by  sentence  analysis.     It  is  therefore  a  great  waste  to  spend 
much  time  in  giving  the  full  parsing  of  words. 

9.  The  objective  form  of  a  noun  or  a  pronoun  should  be  used 
in  the  following  constructions: 

(1)  Object  of  a  verb,  verb  phrase,  or  verbal. 

(2)  Predicate  attribute  of  the  object. 
(.'!)   Object  of  a  prepostion. 

(4)  Adverbial  substantive,   including  indirect  object. 

(5)  In  apposition  with  a  noun  or  pronoun  in     an     objective 
construction.  , 

(6)  Subject  of  an  Infinitive. 

(7)  Joined  to  a  noun  or  pronoun  in  an  objective  construc- 
tion by  a  verbal  of  a  copulative  verb. 

(a)  Who  made  that   noise     Only  I. 
Subject  of  the  verb  understood. 

(b)  This  is  the  student  whom  all  are  praising. 
Object  of  verb  phrase  are  praising. 

(c)  Whom  is  that  for? 

Object  of  the  preposition  for. 

(d)  We  thought  it  was  he. 
Predicate  attribute  in  noun  clause. 

(e)  We  boys  are  going  to  the  ball  game. 

Subject  of  the  verb  phrase  "are  going." 

10.  (a)  We  have  heard  the  news. 

The  words  have  heard  are  an  attributive  transitive  verb 
phrase.  It  is  made  up  of  the  verb  have  and  the  verbal 
heard.  The  verb  have  is  an  irregular  weak  verb.  The 
verbal  heard  is  a  form  of  the  verb  hear  which  is  an  irreg- 
ular weak  verb. 

(b)  The  days  are  growing  colder. 

The  words  are  growing  are  a  copulative  verb  phrase.  The 
verb  are  belongs  to  the  old  conjugation.  The  verbal 
growing  is  a  form  of  the  verb  grow  which  is  a  strong  verb. 

(c)  We  should  observe  keenly. 

The  verb  should  is  an  attributive  transitive  verb. 
It  is  an  irregular  verb. 

(d)  There  lay  the  lost  pocket  book. 

The  verb  lay  is  an  attributive  intransitive  verb.  It  be- 
longs to  the  strong  conjugation. 

(e)  Set  the  table  quickly. 

The  verb  set  is  an  attributive  transitive  verb.  It  belongs 
to  the  weak  conjugation. 

11.  The  word  morning  is  a  common  noun.  It  is  of  the  third 
person,  singular  number,  neuter  gender,  objective  case.  Its  de- 
clension is: 

Singular  Plural 

Nom.  and  Obj.      morning  mornings 

Poss.  morning's  mornings' 

It  is  used  as  an  adverb  modifier  of  the  verb  rose. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION   BOOK.  47 

The   word   before  is  a  subordinate  conjunction.     It  joins  the  ad- 
v'i  ,;  clause,  before  the  .sun  was  up,  to  the  verb  rose. 

The  word  was  is  a  copulative  verb.     It  belongs  to  the  strong 
juration.      Its   principal    parts  are   be,  am,   \us   and   been.      It 

the  indicative  mode,  and  past  tense.     It  is  in  the  third  pel 

guiar  number,  to  agree  with  its  subject  sun. 

'I he  word  rose  is  an  attributive  intransitive  verb.     U  Is  a  -.em  <>. 

the    Strong    conjugation.      Its    principal    parts    are    rise,    rose,    risen. 

It  is  in   the  active  voice,   indicative  mode,  and   past  tense.      It  U   In 

the  first  person,  and  singular  number,  to  agree   with  its  subject,  I. 
12.    (a;    before    verbs   are    classified    as    transitive   ana    intransi- 
tive, they  have   been  classified  as   copulative  and    attribu- 
tive. 

Classify  the  verbs  in  the  following  sentences  as  copulative 
or  attributive.     Name  the  idea  that  every  attributive 
expresses. 

1.  Take  this  book  home. 

2.  The  days  grow  cold. 

3.  I  have  many  books. 

4.  She  grows  rapidly. 

').  There  are  many  people  in  need  now. 

0.  We  should  help  them. 

7.  They  need   food  and  clothing. 

The  snow  falls  steadily. 
'.).  The  boys  pull  their  sleds  up  the  hill. 
10.  They  coast  down  the  hill. 
The  verbs  in  sentences  1,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9  and   10  \ 
tributive  verbs.     These  verbs  in  sentences  I 
express   transitive   action,    possessive,   obligation,    or 
These  verbs  are  transitive  verbs.     The  other  ver 
transitive  verbs. 
Definitions.     A  Transitive  Verb  is  a  verb  that  expresses    f  \  )   a 
transitive  act,   (2)   possession,    (3)   obligation,  or    f4)    l&r.::  or  need. 
An    Intransitive   Verb   is   a   verb    that    does    not    express    I  1  )    a 
transitive  act,    ( 2  j    possession,    (3)   obligation,  or    (4)    lack   or  need, 
(b)    Review  and  drill  lesson  on  the  three  kinds  of  clauses. 
Analyze   the   following  sentences  and   classify   the  clauses 
as  adjective,    adverbial,   or  noun.      If  the  clause  is  an  ad- 
jective clause,  tell   whether  it  is  a  limiting  or  purely  de- 
scriptive   clause.      If   adverbial   tell    what   idea   the  clause 
expresses.      If  a  noun  clause,   give  its  construction    in   the 
sentence. 

1.  The  house  that  stands  on  the  hill  belongs  to  Colonel 

Smith. 

2.  I  know  that  he  received  the  message. 
'■',.   He  came  when  his  turn  arrived. 

4.  The  house  stands  where  three  roads  meet. 

5.  We  study  the  lessons  which  the  teacher  assigns. 

6.  The  thought  that  vacation  was  near  kept  our  energy 

up. 

7.  I  will  pay  you  if  you  will  do  the  errand. 

8.  Mr.  Smith,  who  is  my  friend,  is  passing. 


48  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

9.  That  you  have  done  your  work  well  is  evident. 

10.  The  man  worked,  tho  he  was  very  tired. 

11.  Our  difficulty  was  that  we  were  scarce  of  money. 

12.  He  gave  the  money  that  he  might  help  the  poor. 

13.  The  children  work  as  they  play. 

14.  He  promised  everything  except  that  he  would  return 
to  school. 

15.  They  sent  for  him  because  he  was  needed, 
(c)   Classification  of  nouns  as  common  and  proper. 

The  following  nouns  are  names  of  the  same  person:  man, 
lather,  American,  Andrew  Blake,  farmer,  student.  How 
many  of  these  names  does  he  share  with  other  persons,  or 
have  in  common  with  them  ?  With  whom  does  he  share 
each  one  ?  Which  one  is  his  own,  his  unshared,  name  ? 
The  following  nouns  are  names  of  the  same  place::  city, 
New  York,  sea-port,  metropolis.  Which  names  does  this 
place  share  with  other  places  ?  Which  one  is  unshared, 
or  is  applied  to  it  alone  ? 

The  word  proper  means  one's  own  or  unshared.  The 
nouns  Andrew  Blake  and  New  York  are  proper  nouns. 
What  then  is  a  proper  noun  ? 

The  word  common,  in  the  sense  in  which  it  is  used  in 
grammar,  means  belonging  to  more  than  one.  All  the 
nouns  that  you  have  examined  except  Andrew  Blake  and 
New  York  belong  to,  or  are  applied  to,  more  than  one 
thing.  They  are  common  nouns.  What,  then,  is  a  com- 
mon noun  ? 

Other  kinds  of  common  nouns  must  be  studied  in  later 
lessons. 

13.  (a)    No  English   verb   has  a  passive  form.     Transitive  verb 

phrases  have  a  passive  voice. 

(b)  Passive  verb  phrases  are  formed  by  the  use  of  some 
form  of  the  verb  be  and  a  perfect  participle, 

(c)  The  object  in  the  original  sentence  becomes  the  subject 
of  the  passive  verb  phrase. 

The  subject  of  the  verb  in  the  active  voice,  if  it  is  not 
omitted,  becomes  the  object  of  the  preposition  by,  when 
the  verb  is  changed  to  a  passive  verb  phrase. 

(d)  The  passive  voice  is  used  (1)  when  the  name  of  the 
actor  is  unknown,  (2)  when  the  speaker  does  not  wish  to 
tell  the  name  of  the  actor,  (3)  when  the  speaker  wishes  to 
attract  more  attention  to  the  other  thing  involved  in  the  act 
than  to  the  actor.  It  may  also  be  used  occasionally  for 
the  sake  of  variety. 

The  passive  voice  is  much  overworked  by  many  persons 
In  most  cases,  the  active  voice  is  simpler  and  more  direct, 
and  it  should  be  used  unless  some  special  reason  for  the 
use  of  the  passive  exists. 

14.  He  has  gone  to  the  city  where  he  always  liked  to  visit. 

If  the  speaker  had  alread  been  talking  about  some  partic- 
ular city  and  the  hearer  knew  what  city  he  had  in  mind, 
the    clause    in    this    sentence    is    purely    descriptive    and 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  49 

should  b«  a«t  off  by  th«  comma;  thus,  He  has  gone  to  the 
city,  where  he  always  liked  to  visit. 
If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  clause  is  needed  to  show  what  city 
the  speaker  had  in  mind,   it  is  a  limiting  clause  and  no 
comma  should  be  used. 


GEOGRAPHY.-— Answers. 

By  Herbert  Bassett,  Teacher  of  Geography, 
Western   Illinois   State  Normal  School. 


1.  Three  elements  of  climate  are  heat,  moisture  and  wind. 
(Sometimes  sunshine  is  given  as  a  fourth.) 

Washington  and  Maine  are  both  in  the  Prevailing  Westerlies, 
hence  Washington  has  an  oceanic  climate,  while  Maine  has  a  con- 
tinental climate.  The  Westerlies,  on  ascending  the  Coast  Range 
and  Cascades,  give  western  Washington  the  heaviest  rainfall  in  the 
United  States. 

2.  England  must  be  a  great  commercial  nation,  primarily  be- 
cause of  a  large  industrial  population  which  must  have  food,  raw 
materials  for  manufacture,  and  markets  for  its  products. 

The  insular  position,  good  harbors,  position  relative  to  other  na- 
tions, moist  climate  favorable  for  textile  manufacture,  abundant 
coal  which  means  power  for  manufacturing  purposes,  absence  oi. 
great  agricultural  areas,  and  character  of  the  people,  all  contribute 
to  the  same  end. 

England  needs  colonies  to  produce  raw  materials  for  her  factories 
and  to  provide  markets  for  her  manufactured  goods.  A  large 
merchant  marine  demands  a  strong  navy  for  its  protection. 

Five  geographic  conditions  that  may  determine  the  location  oi: 
cities  are:  1st,  good  harbors,  examples,  New  York,  Liverpool,  San 
Francisco. 

2nd,  Power  for  manufacturing  purpose,  either  in  the  form  of  wa- 
ter power  or  coal.  Examples  of  water  power,  Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y., 
and  The  Fall  Line  Cities,  of  Eastern  United  States.  Examples  of 
coal,  for  power,  Pittsburg,  Pa.,  Chicago,  near  coal  fields. 

3rd,  The  crossing  of  highways  of  travel.  Ex.,  Indianapolis  is  a 
Railroad  center.  St.  Louis  is  at  the  crossing  of  the  Mississippi  R. 
and  Railroads  running  East  and  West. 

4th,  A  rich  hinterland,  from  which  many  products  are  sent.  Ex- 
amples, Chicago  and  New  York. 

5th,  Some  local  natural  resource.  Copper,  at  Butte,  Montana,  and 
Houghton  and  Hancock,  Michigan.  Diamonds  at  Kimberley,  Africa. 

4.  It  is  warmer  in  summer  than  in  winter;  1st,  because  the  rays 
of  the  sun  are  more  nearly  vertical  in  summer  than  in  winter.  These 
vertical  rays  have  more  effect  in  raising  the  temperature  for  two 
reasons:  1st,  because  a  given  number  of  rays  cover  a  smaller  area, 
and  as  a  consequence  the  heat  is  all  concentrated  on  a  smaller  area, 


50  ILLINOIS  STATE   QUESTION    BOOK. 

and,  2nd,  the  vertical  rays  pass  thru  less  air  to  reach  the  earth 
and  have  lost  less  of  their  heat  to  the  atmosphere. 

Sui  .  mef  than  winter,  .ind,  because  the  days   (hours  of 

sunshine)   are  longer  in  summer  than  in  winter. 

The  easons  is  cL.e  to  1st,  the  revolution  of  the  earth 

around  the  sun.  2nd,  the  inclination  of  the  earth's  axis,  and  3rd, 
Lo  the  parallelism  of  the  earth's  axis.  These  three  causes  result 
in  the  vertica  rays  of  the  sun  moving  back  and  forth  23  % c  North 
and  South  of  the  equator,  carrying  the  greater  heat  first  to  the 
North  and  then  to  the  South  of  the  equator. 

...  flams  are  likely  to  he  rather  low  level  tracts  of  country 
with  fertile  soil  and  often  plenty  of  rainfall.  These  conditions  fa- 
vor Agriculture.  Plateaus  are  likely  to  be  semi-arid,  favoring  graz- 
ing. If  well  watered  the  rivers  may  he  swift,  favoring  manufac 
taring.  If  deeply  dissected  by  erosion,  mining  may  be  the  char- 
acteristic industry.  Mountains  are  characterized  by  mining  indus- 
tries, as  mineral  wealth  is  likely  to  he  exposed  by  erosion. 

0.  The  South. — South  Carolina,  Georgia,  Alabama,  Mississippi, 
Louisiana,  and  Texas,  constitutes  the  "Cotton  Belt"  producing 
three-fourths  of  the  world's  supply  of  cotton.  Cotton  requires  a 
long  season  in  which  lo  mature,  plenty  of  rainfall  properly  distrib- 
uted and  favorable  soil  conditions,  all  of  which  are  found  in  this 
area. 

The  "Corn  Belt"  includes  Western  Ohio,  Indiana,  Illinois,  Iowa, 
Northern  Missouri!  Eastern  Kansas,  and  Eastern  Nebraska.  The 
geographic  factors  are  sufficient  rainfall,  a  growing  season  of  not 
less  than  one  hundred  to  one  hundred  twenty  days,  and  the  ex- 
cellent glacial  drift  soil. 

7.  China:  —  (Chinese  Republic) 

Position:  Eastern  Asia,  20°  to  50°  N.  Latitude  and  75°  to 
185°  E.  Longitude. 

Size:  About  4,000,000  square  miles,  or  1  1-3  times  as  large 
as  United  States. 

Population:  About  400,000,000  or  four  times  population  of 
United  States. 

Surface:  Delta  plains  at  river  mouths,  vast  plateaus  and 
mountains  inland. 

Mineral  Resources:  Vast  mineral  wealth,  largely  undevel- 
oped. 

Products:  Silk,  Tea,  Cotton,  Rice  and  other  raw  materials 
of  commerce  are  exported.  Other  products  raised  for 
home  consumption. 

Form  of  Government:     Republican. 

Recent  Changes:  Government  changed  from  Empire  to  Re- 
public. Trade  with  foreign  nations,  and  even  the  cutting 
off  of  pigtails  by  many  Chinese  indicate  the  "awakening 
of  China".  " 

8.  Water  that  has  fallen  as  rain  may  1st,  sink  into  earth  and 
become  ground  water.  2nd,  Run  off  forming  streams.  3rd,  Evapor- 
ate. The  conditions  which  determine  which  of  the  three  things 
shall  happen,  are  porosity  of  soil,  slope  of  ground,  amount  and  rate 
of  rainfall,  amount  of  water  already  in  soil,  dryness  of  the  air, 
presence  or  absence  of  vegetation. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION   BOOK.  51 

Dry,  loose,  level  ground,  the  presence  of  vegetation  and  slow  rain 
fall  favor  the  sinking  in  of  the  water. 

Wet,  hard  soil,  steep  slopes,  the  absence  of  vegetation,  and  a 
rapid  abundant  downpour,  favor  a  large  run  off. 

Very  dry  air  favors  rapid  evaporation. 

In  most  regions  the  formation  of  ground  water  is  of  the  great 
est  advantage  to  Agriculture. 

9.  The  countries  which  lead  in  the  production  of  the  following 
articles  are:  — 

Coffee,  Brazil. 
Corn,  United  States. 
Wool,  Australia. 

Diamonds,  Kimberley,  British  S.  Africa. 
Cotton,  United  States. 

The  States  which  lead  in  the  production  of  the  following  articles 
are: 

Hogs,  Iowa.  (Prom  Year  Book,  Dept.  Agr.   1913) 

Wheat,   Kansas. 
Rice,  Louisiana. 
Oranges,  California. 
Cane  Sugar,  Louisiana. 

10.  The  Wind  belts  crossed  in  sailing  from  v  to  Cape; 
Horn  are: — 1st,  Prevailing  Westerlies,  from  New  York  to  about  35 
degrees  north  latitude.  2nd,  Horse  Latitudes,  from  about  35  to  30 
degrees  north  latitude.  3rd  Northeast  Trades,  from  about  30  to  5 
degrees  north  latitude.  4th,  Doldrums,  from  about  5  degrees  north 
to  5  degrees  south  latitude.  5th,  Southeast  Trades,  from  5  to  30 
degrees  south  latitude.  6th,  Horse  Latitudes,  from  about  30  to  3f> 
degrees  south  latitude.  7th,  Prevailing  Westerlies,  from  about  35 
degrees  south  latitude  to  Cape  Horn.  The  same  wind  belts  will  be 
crossed  in  the  reverse  order  in  going  from  Cape  Horn  to  San  Fran- 
cisco. 

Rain  might  be  expected  in  the  Doldrums,  because  of  the  as- 
cending air  currents,  and  in  the  Westerlies,  because  of  the  poleward 
mo\  ement  of  the  air.  Dry  weather  would  be  expected  in  the  Horse 
Latitudes  because  of  the  descending  air  currents,  and  in  the  Trades 
because  of  the  equatorward  movement  of  the  air. 

11.  Northern  Germany  is  a  region  of  plains  and  lowlands,  h 
Agriculture  is  the  leading  industry.     Southern   Germany   is  rough 
and  mountainous,  hence  manufacturing  and   mining  are  the  leading 
industries. 

12.  The  Atmosphere  is  the  air.      Its  constituents  are  Nitro 
Oxygen,   Carbon-dioxide,   and  Water   Vapor.      It  often   contain 
purities  as  dust  particles,  and  minute  quantities  of  various  gas 

The  uses  of  the  different  constituents  are: — Nitrogen  gives  mass 
to  air,  forming  nearly   8-10  of  the  atmosphere.      Dilutes  the  ; 
element  oxygen   and   forms  compounds   essential    to    both    plant    and 
animal  life. 

Oxygen  is  essential  to  all  respiration,  oxidation  and  decay. 

Carbon  dioxide  is  an  essential  plant  food,  it  1ms  a  large  effect  in 
regulating  the  temperature  of  the  earth's  surface. 

Water  vapor  is  necessary  for  rainfall,-  upon  which  all  life  depend 


52  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

The  dust  particles  diffuse  the  sunlight,  and  probably  serve  as 
a  nucleus  about  which  the  water  vapor  condenses. 

The  atmosphere  (winds)  distributes  the  rainfall.  When  the  tem- 
perature of  the  air  is  high,  its  vapor  capacity  is  great.  Cooling  the 
air  causes  condensation  and  precipitation  of  the  water  vapor. 

13.  Two  kinds  of  forests  are:  — 

Tropical  forests,  due  to  high  temperature  and  abundant  rain- 
fall. 

Temperate  forests,  due  to  moderate  rainfall  and  alternate  warm 
and  cold  seasons. 

Two  kinds  of  grasslands  are:  — 

Savannas,  due  to  high  temperature  and  alternate  wet  and  dry  sea- 
sons. 

Steppes,  due  to  semi  arid  conditions. 

Two  kinds  of  deserts  are: 

Hot  or  dry  deserts,  due  to  high  temperature  and  slight  rainfall. 

Cold  deserts,  or  Tundras,  due  to  low  temperature. 

14.  "Conservation  of  Natural  Resources"  means  such  use  of 
natural  resources,  that  the  present  generation  may  have  all  that 
they  need  without  the  robbing  of  future  generations. 

The  resources  which  should  be  conserved  are  the  forests,  miner- 
als, soils,  waterpower,  fish  and  game. 

Forests  may  be  conserved  by  1st,  cutting  only  "ripe"  trees;   2nd, 
Care  of  young  trees  in  felling;   3rd,  Prohibiting  grazing,  especially 
of  sheep  and  goats  in  young  forests;  4th,  Prevention  of  forest  fires 
5th,  Sometimes,  reforestation  by  planting. 


U.  S.  HISTORY— Answers. 

By  A.  F.  Strome,  Department  of  History, 
Western   Illinois   State  Normal  School. 


1.  Virginia  at  first  made  marked  progress  in  self  government, 
but  in  1624,  she  became  a  royal  province,  and  self  government  in 
a  measure  declined.  The  governor  of  Virginia  possessed  large  pow- 
ers. He  was  appointed  by  the  Crown,  and  was  not  dependent  on 
the  House  of  Burgesses  for  his  salary.  He  had  large  powers  of 
appointment,  and  could  veto  all  acts  of  the  legislature.  The  fran- 
chise was  liberal,  but  in  time  ceased  to  be  of  much  importance  as 
county  affairs  came  under  the  control  of  the  county  judges  ap- 
pointed by  the  governor,  while  the  affairs  of  the  parish  were  man- 
aged by  the  vestry  composed  of  twelve  men  who  held  office  for  life 
and  themselves  filled  all  vacancies. 

As  a  result  of  the  transfer  of  her  charter  to  the  colony  Massa- 
chusetts early  attained  a  large  measure  of  independence  and  suc- 
ceeded in  maintaining  it  during  the  greater  part  of  the  colonial  per- 
iod. The  governor  was  elected  by  the  general  court  and  was  de- 
pendent on  it  for  his  salary.  His  powers  were  therefore,  greatly 
limited.  The  franchise  was  more  restricted  than  in  Virginia,  but 
those  who  voted  were  thoroly  representative  of  the  colony's 
interest.     LUcal  government  instead  of  declining  wa«  of  increasing: 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  53 

importance,  the  town  meeting  becoming  the  most  important  feature 
of  the  colonial  government. 

Industrially  the  two  colonies  also  differed  widely.  Owing  to 
the  favoring  circumstances  of  soil  and  climate,  Virginia  early  gave 
herself  up  to  the  production  of  tobacco  and  developed  the  planta- 
tion system.  In  Massachusetts  on  the  other  hand,  the  soil  yielded 
only  a  scanty  return,  and  tho  agriculture  on  a  small  scale  was 
always  an  important  industry,  the  people  also  early  turned  to  fish- 
ing, ship-building,  trading  and  manufacturing. 

2.  The  conditions  which  seemed  to  favor  the  permanence  of 
French  dominion  in  America  were  the  strength  of  the  French  gov- 
ernment and  the  fostering  care  she  gave  her  colonies,  her  military 
occupation  of  her  territory,  and  her  friendly  relations  with  the  In- 
dians. The  occupation,  however,  was  bound  to  prove  temporary 
because  of  the  superior  genius  of  the  English  as  a  colonizing  na- 
tion, and  to  the  fact  that  the  French  occupation  was  mainly  a 
commercial  and  military  one,  while  the  English  occupation  meant 
the  settlement  and  development  of  the  resources  of  the  country. 
In  the  course  of  time,  superior  resources  were  bound  to  turn  the 
tide  in  favor  of  the  English.  That  the  French  occupation  was 
brought  to  an  end  as  early  as  1763  was  largely  due  to  the  ex- 
igencies of  the  war  in  Europe. 

3.  The  passage  of  the  Stamp  Act  produced  a  storm  of  opposi- 
tion in  America.  Massachusetts  took  the  lead  and  sent  out  a  call 
for  a  general  congress  to  protest  against  the  action  of  Parliament. 
This  was  followed  by  non-importation  agreements.  In  the  meantime 
the  Liberal  party  in  England  temporarily  got  control  of  the  govern- 
ment and  the  Stamp  Act  was  repealed.  The  repeal  however,  car- 
ried with  it  the  so-called  Declaratory  Act,  asserting  the  full  right 
of  Parliament  to  tax  the  colonies.  This  was  followed  in  1767  by 
the  Townshend  Acts,  and  the  storm  broke  out  afresh.  The  colonies 
had  opposed  the  Stamp  Act  on  the  ground  that  it  was  an  internal 
and  direct  tax,  and  the  Townshend  Acts  were  therefore  disguised 
as  external  taxes  in  regulation  of  trade.  But  the  people  realized 
that  a  tax  was  a  tax,  and  denied  all  right  of  Parliament  to  tax  them 
whatsoever.  In  response  to  the  Act,  the  non-importation  agree- 
ments were  revived,  and  committees  of  Correspondence  devised 
to  keep  the  various  colonies  in  touch.  The  objectionable  Acts  were 
finally  repealed,  but  again,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stamp  Act,  effort 
was  made  to  save  the  principle  of  taxation  by  Parliament  by  leav- 
ing a  nominal  three-penny  tax  on  tea.  This  only  served  to  anger 
the  colonies  and  when  English  merchants  attempted  to  land  tea  in 
Boston,  the  citizens  boarded  the  vessels  and  threw  the  tea  into  the 
harbor.  This  and  other  acts  of  violence,  however,  brought  about 
the  passage  of  the  so-called  Retaliatory  Acts,  closing  the  ports  of 
Boston  and  annulling  the  charter  of  Massachusetts,  establishing  in- 
stead, a  military  government  under  General  Gage.  The  Retaliatory 
Acts  in  their  turn  stirred  the  colonies  to  more  determined  resist- 
ence,  provisions  were  sent  to  the  suffering  people  of  Boston,  and 
a  call  was  issued  for  a  Continental  Congress.  This  congress  met  in 
1774,  and  at  once  took  measures  providing  for  more  effective  re- 
sjstence.  It  also  addressed  a  petition  to  the  king,  but  this  was  ig- 
nored1, and  "the  colonies  made"  'preparation  for  war.     Massachusetts 


54  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION   BOOK. 

organized  her  militia  and  collected  stores.  General  Gage  then  at- 
tempted to  destroy  the  stores  collected  at  Concord,  and  thus 
brought  on  the  first  battle  of  the  Revolution. 

4.  The  period  immediately  following  the  war  of  1812  was  one 
of  readjustment  for  the  American  people,  and  thousands  who  be- 
fore the  war  had  found  plenty  of  employment  along  the  seaboard 
now  found  it  extremely  difficult  to  win  a  livlihood.  In  the  vast 
region  between  the  Appalachians  and  the  Mississippi  however, 
was  new  opportunity,  and  soon  a  movement  began  which 
in  the  course  of  a  few  short  years  brought  into  the  union  a  galaxy 
of  new  states.  Three  main  routes  opened  the  way  to  this  new  coun- 
try, and  soon  three  great  streams  of  emigrants  were  making  their 
way  westward.  One  composed  chiefly  of  New  Englanders  pushed 
along  Lake  Champlain  and  up  the  Mohawk  Valley  to  the  region  oC 
the  Great  Lakes  and  Northern  Ohio;  a  second  composed  of  botn 
New  Englanders  and  Middle  State  people  made  their  way  to  tne 
Ohio  regions  by  way  of  Pittsburg,  or  the  new  national  pike;  while  a 
third  stream  made  up  mostly  of  emigrants  from  the  Southern 
States,  followed  the  Old  Wilderness  Road  to  Kentucky  and  Ten- 
nessee, or  farther  on  into  Alabama  or  Southern  Indiana  and  Illi- 
nois. The  movement  seems  to  hav©  been  at  its  height  by  1817,  but 
continued  on  almost  unabated  for  some  years. 

The  filling  up  of  the  West  brought  new  problems  to  the  fore- 
front in  national  politics.  Indeed,  there  is  scarcely  a  political  is- 
sue of  the  period,  1815  to  1840,  which  was  not  the  expression  of 
western  influence.  The  internal  improvement  movement  was  an 
expression  of  the  western  demand  for  an  outlet  for  its  products. 
The  tariff  controversy  was  largely  the  result  of  the  western  de- 
mand for  home  markets.  It  was  the  need  of  the  West  for  mere 
money  which  brought  on  the  Wild  Cat  Banking  craze  and  its  at- 
tendant problems,  and  finally  it  was  the  devotion  of  this  region 
to  free  labor  which  finally  turned  the  tide  against  slavery. 

5.  In  1818  the  territory  of  Missouri  applied  for  admission  to 
the  Union.  Nothing  was  said  in  the  petition  in  regard  to  slavery, 
but  inasmuch  as  the  people  already  held  slaves  it  was  understood 
that  they  intended  to  create  a  slave  state.  But  by  the  time  the 
Ohio  river  had  come  to  be  pretty  definitely  recognized  an  the 
boundary  between  the  slave  and  free  states,  and  since  the  greater 
part  of  Missouri  lay  north  of  this  line,  there  was  bound  to  be  oppo- 
sition to  her  admission  as  a  slave  state.  Moreover,  many  at  the 
north  were  opposed  to  any  extension  of  slavery  west  of  the  Missis- 
sippi. Consequently  when  the  petition  came  before  the  House  of 
Representatives  for  debate,  James  Talmadge,  of  New  Yor1:,  pro- 
posed an  amendment  designed  to  exclude  slavery  from  the  state. 
The  amendment  passed  the  House  but  was  blocked  in  the  Senate 
where  the  slave  holding  interests  had  a  majority.  Neither  side 
would  yield,  and  the  matter  dragged  on  until  1820,  when  the  ter- 
ritory of  Maine  applied  for  admission  and  another  deadlock  was 
brought  about.  The  Southern  senators  refusing  to  permit  Maine 
to  come  into  the  Union  as  a  free  state  unless  the  Northern  repre- 
sentatives would  admit  Missouri  as  a  slave  state.  It  was  clenr  that 
a  compromise  was  necessary,  and  it  was  finally  agreed,  after  a  bit- 
ter struggle  that  Missouri  should  come  in  as  a  slave  state  on  con- 
dition  that   Maine   be   admitted    as   a    free   state,    and   that    slavery 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  55 

should  be  excluded  from  all  the  remainder  of  the  Louisiana  Pur- 
chase north  of  36°  30". 

6.  Five  of  the  chief  weaknesses  of  the  Articles  of  Confederation 
were: 

(a)  The  confederation  was  a  mere  league  of  sovereign  states 
and  not  a  real  national  union. 

(b)  The  machinery  of  government  was  inadequate.  There 
was  no  well  defined  executive  to  enforce  the  laws,  and  no 
judiciary  to  interpret  them,  or  to  settle  disputes  between 
the  states. 

(c)  Congress  had  insufficient  power;  for  example,  it  had  no 
power  to  collect  taxes  or  to  regulate  commerce. 

(d)  The  voting  in  Congress  was  by  states,  and  the  consent 
of  nine  states  was  necessary  for  the  passage  of  any  law. 

(e)  Congress  had  no  power  to  enforce  its  treaties  with  for- 
eign nations. 

The  constitution  remedied  these  defects  by  creating  a  real  nation- 
al government  having  direct  authority  over  individuals,  by  provid- 
ing three  distinct  departments  of  government,  by  conferring  on 
Congress  full  power  to  levy  and  collect  taxes  and  to  regulate  com- 
merce with  foreign  nations  and  between  states,  by  giving  each 
senator  and  representative  in  Congress  one  vote  and  requiring  only 
a  majority  for  the  passage  of  laws,  and  by  making  treaties  a  part 
of  the  law  of  the  land  enforceable  by  national  authority. 

7.  During  this  period  a  variety  of  events  tended  to  increase 
our  standing  among  the  nations  of  the  world.  First  and  foremost 
doubtless,  was  our  great  national  growth.  The  establishment  of 
the  national  credit  during  Washington's  administration  was  anoth- 
er large  factor.  The  punishment  of  the  barbary  states  and  the  war 
with  England  also  had  a  salutary  effect  in  that  they  showed  that 
the  American  people  were  not  inclined  tamely  to  submit  to  viola- 
tions of  their  rights.  The  achievements  of  the  navy  during  the 
War  of  1812  were  especially  efficacious  in  impressing  upon  Eu- 
ropean nations  this  lesson. 

8.  In  1836,  Texas,  which  had  come  under  control  of  emigrants 
from  the  United  States,  rebelled  against  Mexico  and  gained  her  in- 
dependence. Later,  Texas  applied  for  admission  to  the  Union.  In 
184  4,  the  Secretary  of  State,  John  C.  Calhoun,  negotiated  a  Treaty 
of  Annexation  with  Texas,  but  the  Senate  refused  to  ratify  it.  The 
friends  of  slavery,  however,  were  determined  to  annex  Texas.  The 
democratic  party  made  the  annexation  of  Texas  an  issue  in  the 
campaign  of  184  4,  and  on  their  triumph  in  the  election,  Congress 
at  oi)ce  admitted  Texas  by  a  joint  resolution,  it  being  impossible 
to  secure  the  necessary  two-third  vote  to  ratify  a  treaty  in  the 
Senate. 

The  annexation  of  Texas  became  the  direct  cause  of  the  War 
with  Mexico.  Texas  claimed  the  Rio  Grande  as  her  western  bound- 
ary while  Mexico  claimed  that  Texas'  west  boundary  was  the  Neu- 
ces  river.  When  Texas  was  admitted  to  the  Union,  her  claim  be- 
came the  claim  of  the  United  States.  President  Polk  ordered  Gen- 
eral Taylor  to  take  possession  of  the  disputed  territory  and  this 
was  followed  by  war. 

9.  The  Kansas-Nebraska  Act,  as  finally  passed  in  1853,  provid- 
ed  for  the  repeal  of  the  Missouri  Compromise,   and  the  organiza- 


56  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

tion  of  the  two  territories  of  Kansas  and  Nebraska,  under  the  prin- 
ciple of  Popular  Sovereignty  that  is  the  right  of  the  territories  to 
determine  for  themselves  whether  they  should  or  should  not  have 
slaves. 

The  Act  was  not  a  compromise,  tho  the  friends  of  slavery 
maintained  that  it  was  merely  an  extension  of  the  idea  of  the  Com- 
promise of  1850.  All  parties  had  professed  to  regard  the  Com- 
promise of  1850  as  a  settlement  of  the  slavery  trouble  but  the  re- 
peal of  the  Missouri  Compromise  re-opened  the  entire  question.  The 
North  regarded  the  Act  of  1820  as  a  solemn  agreement,  and  its 
violation  by  the  friends  of  slavery  started  a  new  agitation  in  op- 
position to  the  extension  of  slavery,  which  ended  only  with  the 
Civil  War. 

10.  The  fundamental  cause  of  the  Civil  War  was  the  geograph- 
ic differences  between  the  North  and  South.  These  gave  rise  to 
distinct  social  and  industrial  institutions,  which,  in  the  course  of 
their  development  brought  the  two  sections  into  conflict.  The 
main  points  at  issue  were  the  tariff  and  slavery.  After  1832,  the 
tariff  controversy  quieted  down,  but  about  the  same  time  the  South 
came  to  a  realization  of  the  fact  that  slavery  must  expand  in  order 
to  perpetuate  itself,  and  a  movement  was  begun  for  the  extension 
of  slave  territory.  This  was  resisted  by  the  North,  which  had 
gradually  developed  an  antagonism  to  the  whole  institution  of 
slavery,  and  the  struggle  thus  started  finally  culminated  in  the 
Civil  War.  The  immediate  cause  of  the  Civil  War  was  the  se- 
cession of  the  Southern  States. 

11.  As  Commander  in  Chief  of  the  Army  and  Navy,  the  Presi- 
dent has  extensive  powers  in  time  of  war  which  he  does  not  possess 
in  time  of  peace.  The  Emancipation  Proclamation  was  issued  under 
the  authority  of  these  so-called  war  powers,  its  ostensible  object 
being  to  cripple  the  enemy.    As  a  war  measure  it  applied  only  to  the 

territory  in  rebellion,  and  would  cease  to  be  effective  as  soon  as 
the  war  was  over.  In  order  to  make  the  abolition  of  slavery  gen- 
eral and  permanent,  it  was  necessary  to  make  it  a  part  of  the  con- 
stitution,  neither  Congress  nor   the   President  having  that   power. 

12.  Five  of  the  most  noteworthy  achievements  of  the  Roose- 
velt administration  were: 

a.  The  rousing  of  the  nation  to  a  consciousness  of  the  need  of 
action  in  restraint  of  "Big  Business.' 

b.  The   formulation   of   a   definite   policy    for   conserving   our 
natural  resources. 

c.  The  beginning  of  the  Panama  Canal. 

d.  The  passage  of  the  Pure  Food  and  Drug  Act.. 

e.  The  revival  of  the  Inter-State  Commerce  Commission. 

13.  Cuba  had  long  been  a  subject  of  great  interest  to  the  United 
States.  Not  only  had  the  mis-government,  which  the  people  suffered 
at  the  hands  of  Spain,  stirred  the  sympathies  of  the  American  peo- 
ple, but  American  citizens  had  large  financial  interests  on  the  Is- 
land and  the  government  could  not  regard  with  indifference  the  poli- 
tical conditions  there.  In  1895,  a  severe  insurrection  broke  out 
during  which  millions  of  dollars  worth  of  American  property  was  de- 
stroyed and  many  American  citizens  were  thrown  into  Spanish  pris- 
ons.   Mo'reoVerj  thfe  Cuban  pVoftle  were  treated  with  inhuman  cruelty 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  57 

by  the  Spanish  General  Weyler.  The  American  people  were  thoroly 
aroused  and  the  government  was  compelled  to  take  cognizance  of  the 
situation.  President  McKinley  labored  hard  to  get  Spain  to  grant 
the  Cubans  some  degree  of  self  government,  but  without  success. 
Meanwhile,  both  Houses  of  Congress  passed  resolutions  urging  the 
recognition  of  Cuban  independence.  As  time  went  on,  public  opin- 
ion became  more  and  more  incensed  against  Spain,  until  finally, 
when  the  battleship  Maine  was  blown  up,  in  Havana  Harbor  the 
people  were  aroused  to  such  a  degree  of  indignation  that  the  ad- 
ministration was  compelled  to  take  decisive  action.  After  a  last 
appeal  to  the  Spanish  government,  which  met  with  an  evasive 
reply,  President  McKinley  turned  the  matter  over  to  Congress. 
Congress  then  passed  a  resolution  recognizing  the  independence  of 
Cuba  and  demanding  the  withdrawal  of  Spain  from  the  Island.  It 
also  authorized  the  President  to  use  the  militiary  and  naval  forces 
of  the  United  States  to  carry  these  resolutions  into  effect.  The 
passage  of  these  resolutions  was  a  virtual  declaration  of  war  against 
Spain  and  was  soon  followed  by  actual  hostilities. 

14.  The  thirteen  original  colonies  in  order  of  the  approximate 
dates  of  their  first  settlements  are:  Virginia  1607,  New  York  1613, 
Massachusetts  1620,  New  Hampshire  1623,  Delaware  1627,  New  Jer- 
sey 1627,  Connecticut  1633,  Maryland  1634,  Rhode  Island  1636, 
North  Carolina  1650,  South  Carolina  1670,  Pennsylvania  1682,  and 
Georgia  1733. 

Virginia,  the  first  colony  established  was  settled  at  Jamestown 
in  1607. 

Looked  at  from  the  point  of  view  of  ideals  and  their  influence 
on  the  American  nation,  Massachusetts  was  doubtless  the  best  of  the 
American  colonies.     The  first  settlement  was  at  Plymouth  in  1620. 


ILLINOIS  HISTORY. — Answers 

By  Elbert  Waller,  Superintendent  of  Schools, 
Albion,  111.,  and  author  of  Waller's  History  of  Illinois 


1.  Abraham  Lincoln  and  Richard  Yates,  Sr.,  both  won  dis- 
tinction in  a  political  way.  To  these  we  would  add  Ulysses  S. 
Grant,  John  A.  Logan,  Richard  J.  Oglesby,  John  M.  Palmer,  and 
John  A.  McClernand. 

2.  In  the  early  days,  the  rivers  were  very  important  means  of 
travel  and  transportation  and  even  yet,  they  and  Lake  Michigan 
are  important.  The  climate  is  such  that  nearly  everything  pro- 
duced in  the  Temperate  Zone  can  be  produced  with  profit  in  Illi- 
nois. A  larger  percent  of  Illinois'  soil  is  under  cultivation  than  is 
the  soil  of  any  other  state.  In  most  of  the  State  the  soil  is  ex- 
tremely fertile.  In  the  hilly  portion  of  the  State  where  the  produc- 
tion of  cereals  is  not  so  profitable,  every  variety  of  temperate  cli- 
mate fruit  thrives.  About  two-thirds  of  the  State  is  underlaid  by 
beds  of  coal  of  an  excellent  quality.  Plenty  of  limestone  is  found 
in  a  majority  of  the  counties.  Clay  and  shale  suitable  for  brick- 
making  is  found  in  large  quantities  and  lead  and  sine  are  also 


58  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

found.  The  fact  that  the  state  is  conveniently  located  as  regards 
raw  material  and  markets  for  out-put  has  greatly  encouraged  var- 
ious industries  in  the  state. 

3.  The  Enabling  Act  was  passed  by  Congress  on  April  18th, 
1818.  This  defined  the  present  boundary  and  changed  the  required 
population  from  60,000  to  40,000  people.  A  census  was  taken  show- 
ing 40,000,  tho  in  reality  there  were  only  a  little  over  35,000.  A 
constitution  was  agreed  to  in  a  convention  called  for  that  purpose 
but  was  never  voted  on  by  the  people.  An  election  was  held  for 
Governor,  Lieutenant  Governor,  one  Representative  in  Congress, 
and  members  of  the  General  Assembly.  The  General  Assembly  met 
and  elected  two  U.  S.  Senators  and  as  the  final  act,  Congress  ap- 
proved the  Constitution  December  3d,  1818,  and  President  Monroe 
signed  the  bill  the  next  day.  The  birthday  of  Illinois  is  Decem- 
ber 4th  instead  of  December  3d  as  generally  supposed. 

4.  Black  Hawk  was  a  Sac  chief,  living  near  Rock  Island.  He 
was  cheated  out  of  his  lands  and  his  village  was  burned  in  1831. 
He  fled  from  the  state  but  the  following  spring  he  came  near  his 
old  home  going  to  the  Winnebagoes.  The  people  became  alarmed 
and  called  for  help.  Gov.  Reynolds  led,  in  person,  1800  troops. 
The  President  of  the  United  States  sent  others  and  after  a  series 
of  blunders  on  the  part  of  the  white  people  they  finally  compelled 
him  to  flee.  He  took  refuge  with  the  Winnebagoes  who  gave  him 
up  to  the  United  States  authorities  August  2  7th,  1832  and  the  war 
was  over.  It  had  cost  the  United  States  a  million  dollars  and  had 
taken  7,000  troops  to  put  400  indian  braves  with  their  starving- 
families  off  the  land  of  which  they  had  been  defrauded. 

5.  It  was  customary  in  the  early  days  of  Illinois  to  have  "Mus- 
ter Days"  at  which  time  the  people  all  gathered  together  and  the 
men  engaged  in  military  drill.  After  the  officers  had  "bawled 
themselves  hoarse"  they  would  have  a  barbecue  and  "Sleights  of 
art  and  feats  of  strength  went  round."  They  finally  degenerated 
into  drunken  brawls  and  President  Jackson  recommended  that 
they  be  discontinued. 

It  was  customary  to  have  the  girls  and  their  mothers  seated  on 
one  side  of  the  church  house  and  the  boys  and  their  fathers  on 
the  other.  The  preacher  did  not  work  for  a  salary  but  was  gener- 
ally well  provided  for  by  his  congregation.  Often  he  was  simply 
a  laborer  among  them,  who  preached  for  the  good  of  the  cause.  The 
church  building  was  not  an  imposing  edifice,  but  a  modest  struc- 
ture.    Then  the  finances  of  the  churches  were  never  embarassed. 

6.  As  the  name  might  imply,  the  "Black  Code"  was  for  the  gov- 
ernment of  the  negro.  It  provided:  That  a  negro  could  not  bring 
suit  nor  testify  in  court;  that  if  he  were  found  ten  miles  from 
home  he  could  be  taken  before  a  justice  and  whipped  twenty-five 
lashes;  that  unless  he  had  a  certificate  of  freedom,  his  time  for 
one  year  could  be  sold  by  the  sheriff;  that  he  might  be  sold  on  ex- 
ecution or  mortgaged  for  his  master's  debts  and  that  no  person 
could  bring  a  slave  to  the  state  for  the  purpose  of  freeing  him 
without  giving  a  bond  of  $1000  guaranteeing  that  such  slave  would 
be  a  law-abiding  and  self-supporting  citizen. 

7.  The  writers  of  the  Constitution  of.  1818  tried  to  compel  the 
recognition  of  slavery  in  Illinois  by  inserting  the  expression,  "Nei- 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION   BOOK.  59 

ther  slavery  nor  involuntary  servitude  shall  hereafter  be  intro- 
duced". In  1822,  the  advocates  of  slavery  tried  to  get  the.  consti- 
tution so  amended  as  to  legalize  slavery,  claiming  to  no  linger  oe 
bound  by  the  Ordinance  of  178  7.  The  General  Assembly  in  1823, 
after  unseating  one  member  who  opposed  the  amendment,  had  a 
bare  majority  in  favor  of  the  amendment.  The  proposition  warf 
accordingly  submitted  to  a  vote  of  the  people.  It  was  bitterly  con- 
tested in  the  election  August  2d,  182  4  and  was  defeated  Dy  1668 
votes. 

8.  The  call  on  Illinois  was  for  3,000  troops  but  it  was  respond- 
ed to  by  0,000.  They  were  led  by  General  James  Shields,  and  the* 
engaged  in  the  battles  of  Palo  Alto,  Resaca  de  la  Palma,  Monterey, 
fialtillo,  Victoria,  Tainpico,  and  Buena  Vista,  and  were  successful 
in  every  battle.  A  few  of  them  were  under  General  Scott  on  the 
campaign  from  Vera  Cruz  to  the  City  of  Mexico. 

9.  In  1858,  Lincoln  and  Douglas  were  both  candidates  for  the 
U.  S.  Senate.  Lincoln  challenged  Douglas  to  a  debate  on  national 
issues.  Finally  they  agreed  on  seven  places  where  they  would  de- 
bate. They  were  as  follows:  Ottawa,  Freeport,  Jonesboro,  Charles- 
ton, Galesburg,  Quincy  and  Alton.  Douglas  was  popular  and  Lin- 
coln not  very  well  known.  Douglas  went  with  a  great  deal  oi  pomp, 
while  Lincoln  was  the  opposite.  It  is  generally  conceded  that  Lin- 
coln was  victorious  for  the  state  went  republican  tho  the  dem- 
ocrats held  a  majority  of  the  General  Assembly.  They  gave  each 
other  several  questions.  The  second  Lincoln  gave  to  Douglas  was 
against  the  advice  of  his  friends  but  Lincoln  was  far-sighted  and 
asked  the  question.  It  drove  Douglas  to  a  position  that  it  is  be- 
lieved cost  him  the  presidency  two  years  later. 

10.  Richard  Yates,  Sr.,  was  the  "War  Governor"  of  Illinois. 
He  was  so-called  because  he  took  such  a  decided  stand  in  favor  of 
the  Union  even  to  the  point  of  doing  all  in  his  power  to  organize 
and  equip  the  soldiers  in  Illinois. 

11.  Illinois  has  had  three  constitutions,  the  first  in  1818,  the 
second,  1848,  the  third,  18  70.  I  would  consider  that  a  leading 
feature  of  the  first  was  the  various  provisions  concerning  the  ne- 
gro, one  of  the  second  was  a  provision  prohibiting  the  state  from  in 
any  way  becoming  involved  with  the  banks,  one  of  the  third  was  a 
provision  concerning  Minority  representation. 

12.  Starved  Rock  was  the  scene  of  the  starving  out  of  the  last 
of  the  Illini  Federation  in  the  Illinois  Valley.  Galena  was  the  scene 
of  the  so-called  Winnebago  War.  Old  Salem  was  the  home  of  Lin- 
coln. Nauvoo  was  the  scene  of  the  Mormon  trouble.  Shawneetown 
was  the  home  of  a  tribe  of  Indians  of  that  name.  It  was  also  one 
of  the  earliest  settlements  in  the  State  and  the  location  of  one  of 
the  ill-fated  State  banks.  Vandalia  was  the  location  of  the  second 
capital  of  Illinois.  Alton  was  the  scene  of  the  Lovejoy  murder. 
Freeport  is  the  place  where  Douglas  answered  Lincoln's  question 
concerning  "Squatter  Sovereignty",  the  answer  being  known  as 
the  "Freeport  Doctrine." 

13.  Shadrach  Bond.  In  his  administration  the  famous  "Glack 
Code"  was  enacted.  Edward  Coles.  In  his  administration  the  light 
to  amend  the  Constitution  so  as  to  legalize  slavery  was  waged.  Jo- 
seph Duncan.     In  his  administration  the  murder  of  Elijah  P.  Lov#- 


60  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

joy  occurred.  Richard  Yates,  Sr.  In  his  administration  Illinois 
furnished  259,000  troops  for  the  Civil  War.  Richard  J.  Oglesby. 
In  his  administration  the  Thirteenth  Amendment  was  approved. 

14.  In  1832,  the  idea  of  a  railroad  from  one  end  of  the  State 
to  the  other  was  talked  of  by  Alexander  M.  Jenkins  of  Jackson 
County,  and  in  1836,  the  Illinois  Central  Railroad  Company  was  in- 
corporated, but  nothing  except  a  road  from  Meridosia  to  Spring- 
field was  the  direct  result. 

In  1850,  the  U.  S.  Government  gave  to  the  State  nearly  three 
million  acres  of  land  to  be  used  as  the  State  saw  best  in  building  a 
railroad  from  Cairo  to  LaSalle.  A  new  Illinois  Central  Railroad 
Company  was  organized  in  1851.  By  a  provision  of  their  charter 
they  were  given  the  land  that  the  State  had  received  from  Congress 
for  that  purpose.  The  Company  was  to  pay  no  tax  on  the  chartered 
line  nor  on  the  land  so  long  as  they  owned  it  but  in  lieu  thereof 
they  were  to  pay  5  percent  of  the  gross  earnings  of  the  road  for 
the  first  two  years;  then  a  provision  of  the  charter  was  so  worded 
that  they  were  to  pay  at  least  7  percent  of  the  gross  earnings  to 
the  State.  The  road  was  completed  in  185  6.  It  has  been  a  great 
factor  in  the  development  of  the  State  and  has  paid  into  the  State 
Treasury  more  than  $30,000,000. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  61 

Section  Two 

READING — Questions. 


1.  State  the  main  object  to  be  kept  in  view  in  teaching  (a) 
primary  reading;    (b)   advanced  reading. 

2.  DiBCUSs  supplementary  reading  as  to  (a)  purpose;  (b)  ma- 
terial. 

3.  Name  two  methods  commonly  employed  in  teaching  begin- 
ners to  read,  and  state  the  special  advantage  of  each. 

4.  (a)  State  two  errors  in  methods  of  teaching  reading  which 
lead  to  monotonous  reading  by  the  pupil,  (b)  State  two  ways  by 
which  this  fault  of  the  pupil  may  be  corrected. 

5.  "Every  clod  feels  a  stir  of  might, 

An  instinct  within  it  that  reaches  and  towers, 
And  groping  blindly  above  it  for  light, 
Climbs  to  a  soul  in  grass  and  flowers." 
(a)      Prom  what  is  the  extract  taken?      (b)      By  paraphrasing, 
explain  its  meaning. 

6.  Name  the  author  of  each  of  the  following:  Miles  Standish; 
The  Legend  of  Sleepy  Hollow;  Macbeth;  Lady  of  the  Lake;  Robinson 
Crusoe;  Snowbound;  The  Great  Stone  Face;  The  Chambered  Nau- 
tilus; Apostrophe  to  the  Ocean;  The  Psalm  of  Life;  Thanatopsis. 

7.  The  general  method  of  teaching  a  poem  embraces  the  follow- 
ing: I  Preparation;  II  The  Whole;  III  The  Parts;  IV  The  New 
Whole,  (a)  Comment  on  this  arrangement.  (b)  What  would 
you  include  in  the  preparation?  (c)  Why  should  a  study  of  the 
whole  precede  the  study  of  the  parts?  (d)  Why  at  the  close  should 
we  study  the  poem  as  a  new  whole? 

Daisies — Second  Grade* 

"At  evening  when  I  go  to  bed, 
I  see  the  stars  shine  overhead; 
They  are  the  little  daisies  white 
That  dot  the  meadows  of  the  night. 

And  often,  while  I'm  dreaming  so, 
Across  the  sky  the  moon  will  go; 
It  Is  a  lady,  sweet  and  fair, 
Who  comes  to  gather  daisies  there. 

For  when  at  morning  I  arise 
There's  not  a  star  left  in  the  skies; 
She's  picked  them  all,  and  dropped  them  down 
Into  the  meadows  of  the  town." 


62  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

8.  (a)  What  preparatory  discussion  should  the  teacher  make 
before  taking  up  the  poem?  (b)  How  would  you  present  Ine  whole 
poem  ? 

9.  (a)  What  analysis  would  you  make  of  the  parts  of  the  above 
poem  "Daisies"?  (b)  How  would  you  proceed  to  present  the  poem 
as  "a  new  whole"?  (c)  Suppose  you  desire  the  class  to  memo- 
rize tiie  poem — what  part  will  you  take  in  the  work? 

10.  Upon  what  essential  facts  are  the  ease  and  success  in  teach- 
ing reading  dependent? 

11.  Some  teachers,  in  rural  schools,  devote  a  portion  of  the  ten 
or  fifteen  minute  period  for  reading  to  (a)  reading;  (u)  to  the 
telling  of  the  story  of  the  lesson  by  the  pupils;  (c)  to  the  spelling 
of  the  difficult  words  of  the  lesson.     Comment  on  this  procedure. 

Abraham  Lincoln. 

"This  man  whose  homely  face  you  look  upon, 

Was  one  of  Nature's  masterful  great  men; 
Born  with  strong  arms  that  unfought  victories  won. 

Direct  of  speech,  and  cunning  with  the  pen, 
Chosen  for  large  designs,  he  had  the  art 

Oi  winning  with  his  humor,  and  he  went 
Straight  to  his  mark,  which  was  the  human  heart. 

Wise,  too,  for  what  he  could  not  break,  he  bent; 
Upon  his  back,  a  more  than  Atlas  load, 

The  burden  of  the  Commonwealth  was  laid; 
He  stooped  and  rose  up  with  it,  tho  the  road 

Shot  suddenly  downwards,  not  a  whit  dismayed. 
Hold,  warriors,  councilors,  kings!     All  now  give  place 
To  this  dead  Benefactor  of  the  Race." 

12.  (a)      What  would  you  state  as  the  pupil's  aim  in  studying 

this  selection? 

(b(  What  would  you  state  as  the  teacher's  aim  in  teach- 
ing it? 

(c)  What  would  you  tell  the  class  the  poet  has  attempted 
here? 

13.  (a)      Name  the  qualities,   as  given  by  the  poet,  that  made 

Lincoln  "one  of  Nature's  masterful  great  men." 
(b)      Suppose  you   wished   to   illustrate   Lincoln's   "cunning 
with  the  pen,"  what  selection  would  you  read  to  the 
class? 

14.  (a)      For  what  "large  designs"  was  Lincoln  chosen? 

(b)  What  was  the  "more  than  Atlas  load"  that  Lincoln 
bore? 

ARITHMETIC — Questions. 


1.  A  bin  is  10  feet  square  and  8  feet  deep.  If  it  is  3/4  filled, 
how  many  bushels  of  oats  does  it  contain? 

2.  An  army  lost  in  one  battle  2/17  of  its  men  and  in  another 
2/5  of  the  remainder,  after  which  there  were  8100  men  left.  How 
many  men  were  in  the  original  army? 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  63 

3.  Divide  3/4  by  5/7  in  two  ways.  Explain  ©&oh.  Which  ahoald 
Be  taught  first?     Way? 

4.  The  tax  to  be  raised  in  a  certain  district  is  $1250.  The  rate 
is  2  1/2%.  It  the  property  is  assessed  at  1/3  of  its  reai  value,  what 
is  the  real  value? 

5.  (a)    36%  of  John's  money  is  $60  more  than  24%  of  it.     How 

much   money  has  he? 

(b)  .05  is  what  per  cent  of  .25? 

(c)  .8%  of  6.75  equals  what? 

(d)  250  is  200%  of  what  number? 

(ej    Write  with  per  cent  mark:  .035,  28.5,  3/4,  7  1/2,  .40. 

6.  A  boy  climbs  a  flag  pole  to  the  height  of  40  feet.  Another 
boy  is  standing  on  the  ground  120  feet  from  the  foot  of  the  iiag 
pole.  If  the  second  boy  is  165  feet  from  a  ball  on  the  top  of  the 
pole,  how  far  is  the  first  boy  from  the  ball?     Draw  a  diagram. 

7.  A  foundation  wall  is  45  by  120  feet  outside  measurement, 
18  inches  thick  and  8  feet  deep.  Find  number  of  cubic  yards  of 
masonry  in  the  wall. 

8.  A  house  is  insured  for  3/4  of  its  value;  if  the  premium  is  $24 
and  the  rate  is  3/8%,  what  is  the  value  of  the  house? 

9.  A  ship  is  58°  48'  20"  west  longitude  and  receives  at  noon  a 
wireless  message  from  one  43°  2'  5"  west  longitude.  When  was 
it  sent? 

10.  Show  by  a  diagram  N.  1/2  of  S.  1/2  of  E.  1/2  of  S.  E.  1/4 
of  a  section  of  land.  How  many  acres  of  land  in  it  and  how  many 
rods  of  fence  will  be  required  to  fence  it? 

11.  How  many  gallons  of  oil  in  a  cylindrical  tank  6  feet  in 
diameter  and  20  feet  high?  How  many  square  yards  of  sheet  iron 
does  it  require  to  make  it,  and  what  is  the  weight  of  the  oil  if  its 
specific  gravity  is  .8? 

12.  State  the  effect  of  prefixing  and  annexing  ciphers  to  a  deci- 
mal and  explain  as  you  would  to  a  class. 

13.  A  dry-goods  dealer  sold  a  piece  of  cloth,  and  gained  12  1/2% 
If  he  had  sold  it  at  90  cents  a  yard,  he  would  have  gained  25%. 
What  was  the  selling  price? 

14.  As  agent,  I  sold  some  wheat  for  $4896  on  a  commission  of 
4%.  I  invested  the  net  proceeds  in  dry  goods,  after  deducting 
my  commission  of  2  %  for  buying.  What  was  my  entire  com- 
mission? 


CIVICS. — Questions. 

1.  By  diagrams,  show  the  United  States  land  survey  system. 
Explain  the  diagrams. 

2.  How  may  the  constitution  of  the  United  States  be  amended? 
Name  three  restrictions  imposed  upon  the  states  by  the  constitu- 
tion. 

3.  Distinguish  between  the  following  forms  of  government: 
absolute  monarchy,  limited  monarchy,  pure  democracy,  republic. 
Give  example  of  each. 


64  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

4.  Name  the  officers  of  a  school  township.  Give  length  of  term 
and  state  the  duties  of  the  officers. 

5.  Define  bribery,  perjury,  civil  suit,  tenure  of  office,  writ  of 
habeas  corpus. 

6.  Explain  fully  what  is  meant  by  congressional  district.  By 
senatorial  district.       By  congressman  at  large. 

7.  What  do  you  consider  to  be  some  of  the  aims  in  teaching 
civic*  ? 

8.  Name  the  three  departments  of  government  and  give  the 
function  of  each. 

9.  Give  qualifications,  term  of  office,  and  manner  of  electing 
a  congressman;  a  senator.       Mow  many  of  each  may  a  state  have? 

10.  Name  the  town  offices  and  give  the  chief  function  of  each. 

11.  How  may  a  senator  be  removed  from  office?  How  a  repre- 
sentative?     How  a  supreme  judge?     How  a  vice  president? 

12.  Show  the  steps  thru  which  a  bill  must  pass  from  its 
introduction  in  our  legislature  until  it  becomes  a  law. 

13.  Name  the  courts  that  constitute  the  judicial  department 
of  the  government  of  the  United  States;  of  the  government  of 
Illinois. 

14.  What  bill  must  originate  in  the  house  of  representatives, 
aad  why? 


STATE  COURSE  OF  STUDY. — Questions. 

For  Third  Grade  Certificate  answer  any  eight  of  the  first  ten  ques- 
tions;  for  Second  Grade  Certificate,  any  eight  of 
3  to  12,  inclusive. 


1.  Discuss  the  advantages  and  disadvantages  of  a  plan  of  alter- 
nation of  studies. 

2.  How  many  classes  in  reading  should  there  be  in  a  country 
school?  Explain  the  plan  suggested  in  the  State  Course  for  com- 
bining the  classes  in  reading. 

3.  Explain  the  useful  purposes  served  by  an  examination  system 
as  given  in  the  State  Course. 

4.  What  suggestions  for  teaching  the  story  and  the  poem  to  first 
year  pupils  is  given  in  the  State  Course?  Why  should  stories  be 
dramatized?     Explain  the  method  to  be  followed  in  dramatization. 

5.  What  useful  objective  material  can  be  used  in  presenting 
second  year  number? 

6.  WThat  are  the  principal  causes  why  some  children  read  in  a 
hesitating  manner?  How  may  the  reading  of  such  children  be  made 
better? 

7.  Discuss  the  value  of  constructive  work  in  the  primary  grades. 
What  important  basic  principles  are  involved? 

8.  What  are  the  important  topics  to  be  studied  in  fourth  year 
geography? 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  65 

9.  What  kind  of  work  in  household  arts  is  suggested  in  the 
State  Course?  What  is  the  purpose  of  such  a  course?  What  plan 
is  suggested  for  doing  this  work  in  country  schools? 

11.  What  things  about  a  picture  should  be  discussed  with  pupils 
in  the  seventh  year?  Discuss  these  things  with  regard  to  any  pic- 
ture to  be  studied  in  the  seventh  year. 

12.  Discuss  boys'  and  girls'  clubs  as  adjuncts  of  the  school. 
Discuss  the  general  plan  of  organization  and  management  of  these 
clubs. 

ORTHOGRAPHY.— Questions. 


For  Third   Grade  Certificate  answer  any  four  of  questions   1   to   5, 

inclusive;  for  Second  Grade,  any  four  of  questions  2  to  fi; 

for  First  Grade,  any  four  of  questions  3  to  7.     A 

list  of  twenty-five  words  will  be  pronounced, 

which  will  count  as  four  questions. 


1.  Define  and  give  examples:  homonym,  suffix,  trisyllable,  diph- 
thong, derivative-word. 

2.  Give  words  to  illustrate  four  sounds  each  of  a,  e,  i,  o,  u. 

3.  Define  and  give  a  word  containing  each  of  the  following: 
post,  inter,  poly,  mono,  cede,  diet,  fleet,  polis,  rupt,  anti. 

4.  Syllabicate,  accent,  and  give  diacritical  marks:  acorn,  arctic, 
fatigue,  tortoise,  pedagogy,  bronchitis,  routine,  suicide,  recall,  bu- 
reau. 

5.  Write  at  least  two  synonyms  for  each  of  the  following: 
scent,  unite,  scorn,  soothe,  scene. 

6.  Use  in  sentences  so  as  to  show  the  meaning:  coral,  choral, 
capitol,  capital,  quay,  isle,  caret,  carat,  statue,  statute. 

7.  Analyze  the  following:  biped,  subscription,  secede,  auto- 
graph, circumscribe,  liberate,  contradict,  paternal,  manufacture, 
transmission. 


PEDAGOGY.— Questions. 

For   Second   Grade  Certificate  use  questions   1   to   8,   inclusive;    for 

First  Grade,  High  School  and  Special  Certificates, 

use  questions  1  to  10,  inclusive. 


1.  Name  five  general  aims  in  public  school  education. 

2.  Show  the  importance  of  "starting  right"  in  the  manage- 
ment of  a  school  or  a  class.  Explain  what  you  mean  bv  "starting 
right." 


66  ILEUM  OiS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

3.  Illustrate  from  your  own  observation  or  experience  how 
"sympathy  for  childhood "  may  work  harm  if  not  controlled  by  the 
right  kind  of  persistence. 

4.  Discuss  in  one  hundred  words  this  subject:  Preparing  be- 
forehand for  the  "first  day  of  school." 

5.  How  would  you  go  about  making  a  daily  program?  Make 
your  statement  apply  specifically  to  the  kind  of  school  in  which 
you  have  taught  or  expect  to  teach. 

6.  Discuss  the  hygiene  of  eyesight  in  the  school-room,  with  ref- 
erence to  these  matters:  Distance  of  reading  matter  from  the  eye; 
direction  of  light;  ink,  pencils  and  paper. 

7.  Speak  of  several  elements  that  are  important  in  securing 
order  in  the  school. 

8.  Present  brief  arguments  for  and  against  corporal  punish- 
ment. 

9.  Show  what  is  wrong  with  the  method  of  conducting  recita- 
tions illustrated  here,  and  indicate  a  better  method: 

Who  discovered  America? 

When? 

Of  what  country  was  he  a  native? 

What  difficulty  did  he  have  with  his  sailors? 

10.  Discuss  the  civic  duties  of  a  teacher,  using  about  120  words. 


ELEMENTARY  SCIENCE. — Questions. 

For  Second  Grade  Certificate  Only.     Answer    any    eight    questions. 


1.  How  may  mosquitoes  spread  disease? 

2.  Explain  carefully  how  a  Ben  Davis  apple  tree  may  be  made 
to  produce  Jonathan  and  Minkler  apples. 

3.  Should  the  crow  and  the  screech  owl  be  killed  ?     Why  ? 

4.  When  should  seed  corn   be  gathered   and  how  should  it  be 
cared  for  during  the  winter  ? 

5.  How  may  new  onion  seeds  be  produced  from  seeds  planted 
in  the  spring  of  the  year  ? 

6.  Is  the  ground  mole  carnivorous  ?     Why  ?     Describe  a  mole's 
front  foot. 

7.  What  plants  are  practical  for  a  school  garden? 

8.  What  causes  a  west  wind  ?     Define  barometer. 

9.  Give  some  of  the  chief  differences  between  black  soil     and 
yellow  clay  soil. 

10.  Give  some  similarities  between  alfalfa  and  red  clover. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  67 

PHYSIOLOGY. — Questions. 


1.  What  is  meant  by  food  adulteration  ?     Give  examples  of  this. 

2.  Locate  and  give  use  of  the  spleen.  Give  the  evil  effects  of 
mouth  breathing.     Describe  and  give  use  of  the  cilia. 

3.  What  important  fluid  in  the  mouth  aids  digestion?  Name 
and  locate  the  glands  from  which  this  fluid  comes.  Describe  this 
fluid's  action. 

4.  Describe  the  circulatory  system  and  trace  a  particle  of  blood 
from  a  starting  point,  showing  the  changes  it  undergoes  in  its  jour- 
ney. 

5.  What  are  the  two  great  divisions  of  the  nervous  system  ? 
Name  and  describe  two  kinds  of  nervous  tissue. 

6.  What  effects  do  you  think  the  use  of  intoxicating  drinks  have 
on  character  ?     What  effects  on  the  vital  organs  ? 

7.  Define  oxidation  and  its  products. 

8.  Name  the  divisions  of  the  digestive  tract.  Show  changes 
food  undergoes  in  each  division  of  the  tract  as  it  makes  its  transit. 

9.  Give  function  of  the  following  glands,  and  locate  the  glands. 
Liver,  kidneys,  perspiratory,  sebaceous,  lachrymal,  parotid,  sublin- 
gual, submaxillary,  spleen. 

10.  Write  briefly  concerning  the  best  methods  of  ventilating  a 
school-room. 

11.  Discuss  the  human  skeleton  as  to  structure  and  composi- 
tion of  the  bones,  also  their  general  and  particular  uses. 

12.  Tell  of  the  spinal  cord  as  to  color,  length  and  diameter,  cov- 
ering, structure,  function. 

13.  Tell  how  we  see,  and  in  doing  so,  name  all  the  different 
parts  of  the  eye. 

14.  Give  five  essential  hygienic  laws  of  health. 


PENMANSHIP.— Questions. 

For  Third  Grade  Certificate  answer  any  four  of  questions  1   to  5: 

inclusive;   for  Second  Grade,  any  four  of  questions  2  to   6; 

for  First  Grade,   any  four  of  questions   3   to   7. 


Penmanship  of  applicant  on  this  paper  will  count  fifty  per  cent. 


1.  Make  a  line  across  your  paper  of  the  push  and  pull  exercise. 
Make  a  line  across  your  paper  of  the  indirect  oval  exercise. 

2.  Make  in  proper  form,  grouped  as  you  would  teach  them,  all 
of  the  small  letters.    What  is  the  proper  height  of  one  space  letters'.' 

3.  White*  a  correct  form  of 'a  bank  draft.    Draw  a  rectangle  3  by 


68  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

5  inches  to  represent  the  back  of  your  draft.  In  this  rectangle, 
write  endorsement  in  full,  making  the  draft  payable  to  E.  F.  Dunne. 
Below  this  write  E.  F.  Dunne's  endorsement  in  blank  when  he 
transfers  the  draft  to  some  one  else. 

4.  What  exercises  do  you  use  to  develop  the  muscles  used  in 
writing  ?  What  exercises  do  you  use  to  teach  uniform  motion  ? 
What  value  do  you  attach  to  such  exercises  ? 

5.  To  what  extent  should  the  teacher  supervise  the  writing 
done  outside  the  regular  writing  period  ?  Give  reasons  for  your 
answer.     Explain  your  plan  for  doing-  this. 

6.  Our  State  Course  says  that  "Correct  position,  movement  and 
rhythm  should  be  established  in  the  first  and  second  grades."  Ex- 
plain what  you  understand  by  these  terms.  What  means  do  you  use 
in  these  grades  to  establish  "correct  position,  movement  and 
rhythm"? 

7.  What  devices  do  you  use  to  stimulate  a  desire  on  the  part  oi 
a  pupil  to  improve  his  writing  ? 


GRAMMAR. — Questions. 

1.  Define  and  illustrate  these  terms:  expletive,  appositive,  ger- 
und, auxiliary  verb,  collective  noun. 

2.  Define  inflection.  What  parts  of  speech  are  inflected,  and 
how  ? 

3.  Use  "what"  in  a  sentence  as  a  relative  pronoun,  as  an  ad- 
jective, as  an  adverb,  as  an  interrogative  pronoun,  and  as  an  inter- 
jection. 

4.  Point  out  and  give  construction  of  each  dependent  clause  in 
the  following: 

(a)  Whither  thou  goest  I  will  go. 

(b)  This  is  the  story  that  we  read. 

(c)  The  ground  is  wet  because  it  has  rained. 

(d)  It  was  so  cold  that  the  mercury  froze. 

(e)  This  we  know,  that  our  future  depends  on  our  present. 

5.  Parse  the  words  in  black  face  in  the  preceding  sentences. 

6.  Fill  blanks  in  the  following  sentences  and  give  reasons: 

(a)  She  invited  Kate  and (me  or  I.) 

(b)      did  you  speak  to  ?      (who  or  whom.) 

(c)  She  has from  a  distant  city,     (come  or  came.) 

(d)  It  must  have  been that  I  met.      (he  or  him.) 

(e)  He  speaks  the  language (plain  or  plainly.) 

(f)      did  you  call  ?      (who  or  whom.) 

(g)  The  color  of  the  roses red.      (is  or  are.) 

(h)      He  has the  book  on  the  table,      (laid  or  lain.) 

(i)      Each  of  the  boys an  apple,      (has  or  have.) 

(j)      Did  you  give  Mary,  or ,  the  message  ?    (I  or  me.) 

7.  Name  and  illustrate  ten   uses  or  constructions  of  nouns. 

8.  What  is  the  difference  between  a  relative  and  a  personal 
pronoun  ?     How  does  a  clause  differ  from  a  phrase  ? 

i).  Use  a  noun  clause  as  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  objeM  com- 
plement, attribute  complement,  Give  .a,  sentence  with  an^adjective 
clause  connected  by  "where.5'     What  part  of  speech  is   ""where"? 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  69 

10.  Tell  part  of  speech  and  use  of  the  words  in  blackface  in 
the  following: 

There  came  a  youth  upon  the  earth 

Some  thousand  years  ago, 
Whose  slender  hands  were  little  worth 

Whether  to  plow,  or  reap  or  sow. 
Then  King  Admetus,  who  had 

Pure  taste  by  right  divine, 
Decreed  his  singing  not  too  bad 

To  hear  between  the  cups  of  wine. 
And  so  well  pleased  with  being  soothed 

Into  a  sweet  half  sleep, 
Three  times  his  kingly  beard  he  smoothed 

And  made  him  viceroy  o'er  his  sheep. 

11.  Write  sentences  showing  four  uses  of  an  infinitive. 

12.  Use  in  sentences  the  following  verb  phrases: 

3rd  person,  plural  number,  present  perfect  tense,  indicative 

mode,  passive  voice. 
2nd  person,  singular  number,     present     tense,      imperative 

mode,   active  voice. 
1st  person,  plural  number,   past  tense,  subjunctive     mode, 

active  voice. 
2nd  person,  plural  number,  past  perfect     tense,     potential 

mode,  passive  voice. 
3rd  person,  singular  number,  future  tense,  indicative  mode, 

active  voice. 

13.  Distinguish  between  gender  and  sex.     Illustrate  three  ways 
in  which  gender  is  shown. 

14.  Analyze  or  diagram: 

One  summer  morning,  when  the  sun  was  hot, 
Weary  with  his  labor  in  his  garden  plot, 
On  a  rude  bench  beneath  the  eaves, 
Sir  Frederigo  sat  among  the  leaves 
Of  a  huge  vine. 


GEOGRAPHY.— -Questions. 

1.  Why  is  the  making  and  reading  of  maps  of  importance  ? 
Explain  the  use  of  the  scale  in  map  making. 

2.  What  were  the  geographic  reasons  for  the  building  of  a  great 
city  at  Chicago  ? 

3.  Name  two  important  river  systems  of  each  continent  and 
tell  into  what  each  system  flows. 

4.  Sketch  a  map  of  the  United  States  and  indicate  the  regions 
of  heavy,  medium  and  scant  rainfall. 

5.  Give  the  causes  of  the  trade  winds  and  their  directions. 

6.  What  is  the  basis  of  location  on  the  earth's  surface  ?  Ex- 
plain. State  the  purpose  of  latitude  and  longitude,  and  tell  from 
where  and  how  each  is  measured. 

7.  East  of  the  Andes,  account  for  the  heavy  rainfall  in  northern 
South  America  and  the  scant  rainfall  in  the  southern  part. 

•     8,-  •  Tn  ,w1iat  ways  and  why  liars  Atfg&tftiria  borate  hitb  com  petition 
with  'the  United  States? 


70  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION   BOOK. 

9.  Give  clear  explanations  of  (a)  the  periodic  rise  and  fall  of 
the  Nile;    (b)  the  rainy  and  dry  seasons  of  India. 

10.  Account  for  (a)  the  Sahara;  (b)  the  Kalahari  Desert  in 
southern  Africa. 

11.  Give  approximate  latitude  of  the  British  Isles,  describe  the 
climate,  and  compare  with  that  part  of  America  opposite  them,  giv- 
ing reasons  for  the  difference. 

12.  Give  approximate  or  comparative  areas  of  (a)  Germany; 
(b) France.  Give  the  boundaries  of  each.  Name  the  principal 
rivers,  and  the  chief  products  of  each. 

13.  Why  are  summer  days  here  longer  than  winter  ones  ?  What 
would  be  the  width  of  each  zone  if  the  inclination  of  the  earth's 
axis  were  30  degrees  ? 

14.  Name  the  chief  world  regions  of  wheat  production;  of  cot- 
ton; of  manufacturing.  What  makes  commerce  necessary  ?  Name 
the  chief  commercial  nations. 


UNITED  STATES  HISTORY. — Questions. 

1.  State  the  chief  object  sought  in  the  exploration,  discovery, 
or  settlement  made  by  each  of  the  following:  Oglethorpe,  Cortez, 
Ponce  De  Leon,  Balboa,  Pilgrims. 

2.  Give  the  date  and  place  of  the  earliest  settlement  in  the 
United  States:  by  the  English;  by  the  Spanish;  by  the  Dutch;  by 
the  French. 

3.  Mention  one  important  event  connected  with  the  settlement 
of  Virginia;  of  Massachusetts;  of  Maryland;  of  New  York;  of 
Georgia. 

4.  State  fully  the  physical  conditions  of  a  country  which  are 
necessary  to  develop  a  high  degree  of  civilization. 

5.  Give  the  territorial  expansion  of  the  United  States  in  chron- 
ological order. 

6.  What  causes  led  to  the  secession  of  the  Southern  States,  and 
wko  were  the  leading  men  in  the  movement? 

7.  Give  the  terms  of  the  compromise  of  1850.  Which  of  these 
terms,  if  any,  were  later  violated  ? 

8.  Contrast  early  conditions  in  Massachusetts  and  Virginia  in 
regard  to  (a)  suffrage,  (b)  education,  (c)  social  life. 

9.  What  was  the  principal  public  service  rendered  by  each  of 
these  men:  Alexander  Hamilton,  Benjamin  Franklin,  Patrick  Hen- 
ry, Thomas  Jefferson,   Eli  Whitney  ? 

10.  What  caused  the  war  of  1812,  and  during  whose  presiden- 
tial administration  did  it  occur  ?     The  Spanish-American  war  ? 

11.  What  are  some  of  the  principal  reasons  for  teaching  his- 
tory ?     How  should  history  be  taught  in  intermediate  grades  ? 

12.  What  two  theories  of  the  function  and  powers  of  the  Na- 
tional Government  have  been  held  since  the  time  of  Hamilton  and 
Jefferson  ? 

13.  Discuss  briefly  the  social,  religious,  and  political  conditions 
in  Europe  just  prior  to  the  discovery  of  America. 


71  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

14.  Give  an  account  of  the  Constitutional  Convention  at  Phila- 
delphia, showing  particularly  the  conflicting  interests  it  represented, 
and  the  three  great  compromises  brought  about. 


ILLINOIS   HISTORY. — Questions. 

1.  Describe  the  prehistoric  conditions  of  Illinois.  State  briefly 
its  mineral  resources  and  the  consequent  results  of  the  same. 

2.  What  importance  attached  to  the  establishment  of  the  north- 
ern boundary  of  Illinois  ? 

3.  What  different  European  nations  have  owned  the  territory 
now  comprising  Illinois  ?     Who  first  explored  the  state  ? 

4.  When  does  the  Illinois  General  Assembly  meet  ?  State  num- 
ber of  members  in  each  house. 

5.  Name  and  locate  the  different  capitals  Illinois  has  had. 

6.  What  historical  importance  attaches  to  Ft.  Dearborn,  Van- 
dalia,  Nauvoo  ? 

7.  What  was  the  Ordinance  of  1787  ?  How  did  the  provisions 
of  this  ordinance  affect  Illinois  ? 

8.  Tell  the  story  of  George  Rogers  Clark  and  his  capture  by 
Kaskaskia. 

9.  Make  a  good  historical  statement  about  each  of  the  follow- 
ing: Joliet,  Marquette,  LaSalle,  Tonti,  Creve  Coeur. 

10.  Give  the  legal  boundaries  of  Illinois,  its  length,  its  width 
and  area. 

11.  State,  in  your  judgment,  the  principal  causes  that  have  op- 
erated to  make  Illinois  one  of  the  wealthiest  and  most  prominent 
states  in  the  Union. 

12.  What  Illinois  men  distinguished  themselves  (a)  as  states- 
men,   (b)   as  presidents  of  the  United  States,   (c)   as  generals  ? 

13.  Write  a  short  sketch  of  the  development  of  Chicago.  Where 
are  our  state  penitentiaries  located  ? 

14.  From  what  sections  of  the  United  States  did  the  early  Ill- 
inois settlers  come  ?  By  what  two  principal  routes  ?  What  were 
their  views  on  slavery  ? 


ILLINOIS   STATE   QUESTION   BOOK. 


Answers  to  Section  Two 

READING — Answers. 

By    H.  T.   White.  Superintendent   of  Schools.  Carlinville.    III. 

1.  (a)     The  main  object  to  be  kept  in  view  m  teaching  primary 
:o  teach  children  to  interpret  t  i  and  written  char- 

-  far  as  English  words  permit,  we  must  teach  children  the 
whic  ire    the   printed    word, 

i.  e..  v  te  phonic  words.     In  addition 

to  teaching  wi  and  the  sound  values  of  letters 

we  must  teach  pupils  to  interpre:  ;   e  sentences.     The 

greater  emphasis   Is  ]  >f  re?  diner,   but   con- 

tent must  not  be  ignored. 

The  main  object   to  }e  kept   In  teaching  advanced 

reading  is  to   as  ::er  intelligently   in 

life's    affairs.     The    study  ■    in   literature 

should  occ  idling  of   read- 

ing so  that  pe  but   what  things 

are  most  worthy  of  reading. 

_.   (a)     Children  nee  use,   from  the 

teacher's  view   -  new  combinations  of 

the    mechanical 
processes  of  re  a  r:her  hand,  the 

I  something  new. 
different  from 

(b)     Tb  in  any  grade 

isal  text,  so 
that  pupils  will  not  wild  be  permitted 

to  enjoy  it,  hence  it    -  read. 

3.  (a)     The  word  me  jacher  of  beginners. 

to  learn  unber  of  words 

the  first  few  weeks  of  working  vocabu 

Children  learn  wor:.  3  ,uickly. 

(b^     The   phoni:  more    time    and    more 

skill  on  the  part  of  ssary.     It  should 

ed    to   accomr  usually    in    separate 

th  :d   is  that  after 

a  child  knows  the  sou:  -   he  can  make  spoken 

4.  (a)     S  to    read    a    sentence 

w  every  word  in  the  £  -  encourages  monot- 

onous .it    giving 

•     IOU1 

wrds  in  a  1  drawling 

manner  as  if  each  word  were  isolated 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUI  BOOK.  73 

(b)  The  first  remedy  for  this  is  to  see  that  the  pupil  knows 
every  word  in  the  sentence  he  is  going  to  read;  the  second  is  to 
have  him  speak  the  words  in  the  same  way  he  would  if  he  were 
not  looking  at  them  in  print.  In  the  first  two  grades  at  least  it  is 
well  to  have  pupils  look  away  from  the  printed  sentence  while  they 
are  saying  it.  This  has  a  tendency  to  promote  naturalness  of  oral 
expression. 

5.  fa)  This  extract  is  taken  from  Lowell's  "Vision  of  Sir  Laun- 
fal." 

(b)  "Everv  clod  is  filled  with  life  and  strength,  and  finds  an 
expression  of  its  vitality  in  the  grass  and  flowers." 

6  The  author  of  Miles  Standish  was  Longfellow;  of  the  Legend 
of  F.ieepy  Hollow,  Washington  Irving;  Macbeth,  Shakespeare;  Lady 
of  the  Lake  Scott;  Robinson  Crusoe,  Defoe;  Snowbound,  Whittier; 
The  Great  Stone  Face,  Hawthorne;  The  Chambered  Nautilus,  Holmes; 
Apostrophe  to  the  Ocean.  Lord  Byron  (Childe  Harold,  Canto  4);  Psalm 
of    Life,    Longfellow;    Thanatopsis,    Bryant. 

7  (a)  The  general  method  of  teaching  a  poem  embraces:  1  Prep- 
aration:^. The  Study  of  the  Poem  as  a  Whole;  3  The  Parts;  4  The 
New  Whole.  This  is  a  good  arrangement.  Surely  we  should  make 
our  preparation  first,  if  we  make  it  at  all,  and  any  one  can  see  the 
need  of  preparation.  It  is  then  well  to  read  the  whole  poem  as  a 
unit  to  get  a  general  notion  author's  purpose  in  writing  it. 
We  should  then  see  the  units  within  the  poem,  such  as  pictures,  apos- 
irophes,  outbursts  of  joy  and  I  admiration  and  the  like.  Then 
we  should  re-read  the  poem  as  a  whole  to  get  as  complete  an  appre- 
ciation of  it  as  we  can  and  till  more. 

Mb)  Ip  the  preparation  for  reading  a  poem  each  pupil  should 
learn  the  pronunciation  and  the  meaning  of  every  word  as  it  is 
used  in  the  given  poem,  the  significance  of  each  figure  of  speech 
and  each  allusion.  Every  pur.il  should  get  the  poets  motive  his 
feeling;  for  example,  if  the  poem  is  a  burst  of  exultation,  the  child 
should   as  far  as  possible  have  the   same  feeling. 

(c)  It  is  better  to  study  the  poem  as  a  whole  before  we  study 
its  part-;  as  un«ts  because  by  the  whole  plan  we  do  not  break  the 
continuity  of  thought  and  the  exact  word  combinations  between  suc- 
cessive stanzas. 

fd)  After  we  have  studied  each  part  as  a  separate  unit  we 
should  study  the  poem  as  a  new  whole  to  get  a  complete  view,  to 
see  the  parts  in  their  proper  setting  and  thus  to  enjoy  the  poets 
feeling  more  fully. 

8  (a)  What  have  we  studied  that  Robert  Louis  Stevenson  wrote? 
Recite  one  or  more  of  his  poems.  What  do  you  remember  about  Mr. 
Stevenson*  If  the  pupils  have  not  learned  anything  from  Stevenson 
I  would  read  them  one  or  two  of  his  other  short  selections  and  tell 
them  some  of  the  things  about  him  that  most   interesting 

tO    them. 

(b)  To  a  second  grade  class  I  would  present  the  whole  poem 
first  by  reading  it  aloud  to  the  class  several  times. 


74  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

9.  (a)  Why  was  Mr.  Stevenson  more  likely  to  see  the  stars  at 
bed  time  than  at  any  other  time?  When  he  sees  the  stars  they 
remind  him  of  what?  What  does  he  mean  by  saying  that  the  stars 
are  daisies?  What  are  "the  meadows  of  the  night"?  Which  way 
does  the  moon  go  across  the  sky?  What  does  he  mean  when  he  says 
that  the  moon  is  a  lady?  What  makes  him  think  that  the  lady  has 
picked  all  of  the  daisies  while  he  was  asleep?  Where  does  he  find 
the  stars  when  he  goes  out  of  doors  in  the  morning?  What  did  the 
stars  become  as  soon  as  they  fell  to  "the  meadows  of  the  town"? 
What  are  "the  meadows  of  the  town"? 

(b)  Each  pupil  facing  the  class  should  read  the  whole  poem 
aloud  to  the  class. 

(c)  I  would  have  the  children  say  the  poem  in  concert  with 
me  two  or  three  times  a  day  until  they  had  all  learned  it. 

10.  "Essentials    of    First    Lessons." 

"The  first  lessons  in  reading  should  make  sure  of  a  few  vital 
things.     The  following  points  are  of  especial  importance: 

(a)  The  child  should  associate  the  written  symbol  directly  with 
the  thing  symbolized.  The  method  used  involves  the  sentence  method. 
The  work  in  phonics  which  concentrates  the  child's  attention  on 
form  rather  than  on  thought  is  not  begun  immediately,  but  whea 
begun,  it  is  for  some  time  kept  separate  from  the  reading  lesson. 

(b)  From  the  very  first  the  child  should  look  upon  reading  as  a 
thought-getting  and  a  thought-giving  process.  This  implies,  first, 
that  the  material  used  will,  from  the  child's  point  of  view,  be  worth 
thinking  about,  and  second,  that  the  oral  reading  will  be  done  In 
sentences  rather  than  in  isolated  words.  The  second  suggestion  pre- 
supposes the  silent  study  of  a  new  sentence  before  it  is  read  aloud. 

(c)  Good  reading  necessitates  rapid  eye-movements,  rapid  recog- 
nition  of   not  only  words  but  phrases. 

fd)  Pupils  should  steadily  show  growth  in  power  to  recognize 
new  words.     Drill  in  phonics  gives  this  needed  independence. 

(e)  The  voice  and  body  should  help  to  express  thoughts  effec- 
tively and  appropriately.  To  aid  in  gaining  freedom  of  expression, 
dramatization,  dialogue,  and  play  of  various  kinds  are  used  freely 
to  help  the  reading,  but  are  rarely  introduced  into  the  reading  lesson 
itself  except  during  the  first  weeks  of  school. 

(f)  Opportunities  should  be  given  for  expressing  the  reading 
lesson  by  hand,  in  writing,  picturing,  and  other  forms  of  manual 
activities. 

(g)  As  an  aid  to  gaining  a  mastery  of  the  language  of  choice 
reading  selections,  some  judicious  memory  work  should  be  required." 
(Reading  in  Public  Schools  by  Briggs  and  Coffman,  page  49.) 

11.  If  a  recitation  period  in  reading  is  not  longer  than  fifteen 
minutes,  all  of  that  time  should  be  devoted  exclusively  to  reading. 
Preparatory  lessons  in  pronunciation  and  spelling  should  be  given 
during  the  spelling  period.  Lessons  in  telling  the  story  of  the  read- 
ing lesson  should  be  given  during  the  language  period.  Ten  or  fifteen 
minutes  must  be  spent  in  reading  proper  by  the  pupils. 

12j  (a)  Th,e  pupil's  aim  in  studying  the  poem  "Abraham  Lin- 
coln" might  be  to  get  a  good  grade  for  the  day  and!,   at  the  end 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  75 

of  the  year,  to  pass  to  the  next  grade.  This,  however,  is  a  low  aim. 
His  aim  should  be,  rather,  to  become  better  acquainted  with  his 
friend,  Mr.  Lincoln. 

(b)  The  teacher's  specific  aim  is  a  desire  for  the  pupil  to  appre- 
ciate more  fully  the  greatness  of  heart  and  mind  of  Mr.  Lincoln.  A 
more  general  aim  is  to  have  the  pupil  learn  to  read  better  and 
interpret  better,  any  poem. 

(c)  The  poet  has  attempted  here  to  have  people  see  beyond 
the  homely  face  of  Mr.  Lincoln  or  any  other  man  the  qualities  of 
true  manhood. 

13.  (a)  The  qualities  of  Lincoln,  as  given  by  the  poet,  are  his 
strength,  bravery,  directness  and  disregard  for  superfluous  details, 
keenness,  ability  to  think  and  express  himself  clearly,  sense  of  humor, 
wisdom,  great  will  power  overcoming  all  obstacles  even  when  the 
very  foundations  of  the  earth  seem  to  sink,  sympathy  in  action  for 
the  oppressed,  willingness  to  endure  hardship  and  to  die  for  a  noble 
cause. 

(b)     Gettysburg   Address. 

14.  (a)  Lincoln  was  chosen  primarily  for  the  "large  design"  of 
saving  the  Union  and  secondarily  for  freeing  the  slaves. 

(b)  He  bore  the  "burden  of  the  Commonwealth,"  the  great  cares 
and  axieties  of  a  fractured  government,  and  so  great  were  his  sym- 
pathies that  he  felt  at  least  indirectly  responsible  for  the  life  of  every 
soldier  taken  in  the  war  and  for  the  sufferings  of  their  widows  and 
children. 


AR,THMETIC-|f^0RGE   R    ^^ 

8X100  cu.  ft  =800  cu.  ft.  nToB^r°^ 

34  of  800  cu.  ft.=6oo  cu  fiiiL  Si  ATE  NORMAL  U.N.H/. 

600X1728  cu.  in.       Ann  ^  ,       ,  ,         Pt      ,    , 

— — : =482.13  +  ,  the  number  of  bushels. 

2150.42  cu.  in 

(2) 

-^-  of  the  number  of  men  remained  after  the  first  battle. 

-A-  of  this    number,  or  JL_  of  the  number  of  men  were 

5  17 

lost  in  the  second  battle. 

_L  of  the  number  of  men  were  lost  in  the  two  battles 

17 

The   remainder,    or  -i-  of  the  number  of  men=8100 

The  number  of  men=l5,300. 

(3) 
(a) 

3  -j-      5    21_^_  20  21  •]     1 

4  7  28   '     28    ■""■  20  20 

This  should  be  taught  first  because  it  easily  and   natur- 
ally grows  out  of  preceding  work  in  division. 


76  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

(b)    5__7 

L-5--L---3.of   -X— -^=1   — l 

4  7  4  5  20  20 

(4) 

$1250—2^2%  of  the  sum  fcr  which  the  property  is 
assessed. 

$500=1%  of  the  sum  for  which  the  property  is 
assessed. 

$50,000=the    sum  for  which  the  property  is    assessed. 

This  is  V$  the  real  value,  therefore  the  real  value  is 
$150,000. 

(5) 

36%  of  John's  money — $60+24%  of  John's  money 

Then  12%  of  John's  money^$60. 

(a) 

1%  of  John's  money=$5. 

100%  of  John's  money -==$500 

(b) 
-05_     _!.■==  20    =20%. 

.25    A     5 

(c) 

.8%  =  . 008  ,008  of  6. 75—. 054. 

(d) 

250=200%   of  125. 

(e) 

•  035=3!  z% 

28, 5=285  %• 

M=75% 

71/2=750% 

<04=40% 

(6) 
The  square  on  CB=27,225  sq.  ft. 
The  square  oh  AB=14,400sq.  ft. 
The  square  on  AO=12,825  ft. 
The  line  AC=lI3.24+ft. 
The  line  DC=73.24+ft. 

(7) 
The  perimeter  of  the  wall  is  330  ft. 
8X1^X330    „440_.146?3    the  number  of  cu_  yd 
27  3 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 


7  7 


(8) 


$  24=—  of  the  insured  value. 

^  sou 

$8=-^  of  the  insured  value. 
The  injured  value therefore=$6400. 
Then  $6400— *4  of  the  value  of  the  house. 
The  value  of  the  house  is  $8533. M/2 


1 

1  H 

(9) 

58°    48'  20"  W.,  longitude  of  first  ship 

43°    2'       5"  W.,  longitude  of  second  ship. 

IS0    46'   15"    the  difference  in  longitude.  .         . 

lhr.  3  min.  5  sec,  the  difference  in  time,  since  a 
difference  of  15°  of  longitude  corresponds  to  ad,  fference  o^  1 
hour  of  time,  etc.  Sinceit  was  noon  when  the  message  *as 
received  by  the  first  ship,  it  was  1  hr.  3  mm,  3  sec.  alter 
noon  at  43°     2'    5"  farther  east  when  the  message  was  sent. 

^The  N.  V2  of  S.  !  2  of  H.  !  2  of  S.  E.   \  \  of  a  section   of 
land  contains  20  acres. 

The  dimensions  of  this  plot  are  80  rd.  by  40  id. 
To  fence  it  would  require  240  rd.  of  fencing. 
(U) 
9n  sq.  ft.,  area  of  base. 
18ti  sq.  ft.,  area  of  both  bases. 
6n  ft.,  circumference  of  base 
120:r  sq.  ft.,  lateral  area. 

18tt  sq.  ft. +120*  sq.  ft.— 138ju  sq.  ft.,  total  area. 
3.1416X138=433.54,      the  number  of  sq.    ft.  m  total 

area. 


7$  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

433.54  sq.  ft.-*-9  sq.  ft.™48.17+.  the  number  of  sq.  yd 
of  sheet  iron  required. 

20X9:1  cu  ft=i80jicu.  ft.,  volume  of  tank. 
3.1416X180=565.488,  the  number  of  cu.  ft.  in  tank. 
565.488 X62H  lb=3534. 3  lb.,  weight   of  tank  full   of 


water. 


.8  of  3534.3  lb.— 28274.4  lb.,  weight  of  oil  in  tank. 

9X3.1416X20X1728       .__.  ,___  ,      .    .     4     t 

—      =4230.1440,  no  of  gal.  in  tank. 


231 

(12) 

.5  .05  .005  .0005 

It  can  be  shown  in   this  series  of  decimal  fractions    by 

using  the  equivalent  common  fractions,  if  necessary,  that  .05  is 
-i-  of   .5     that  .005    is  -I_  of   .05    and  -1-    of     .5,    etc.      After 

10  10  100 

examining  a  number  of  suoh  problems  a  pupil  may  be  led  to 
generalize  and  say  that  prefixing  a  cipher  to  a  decimal  divides  it 
by  10,  etc. 

In  a  similar  manner  take  a  number  of  decimal  fractions- 
such  as  .5,  .03,  .004  and  show  by  means  of  the  equivalent 
common  fractions  that  annexing  a  cipher  to  a  decimal  does  not 
change  the  value  of  the  decimal.     For  instance: 

io~ 
.30-^-  30_3 

100  10 

1000         ]0 

(13) 
Bv  the  conditions  of  the  problem: 
125%  of  the  cost  of  1  yd.=$.90 
1%  of  the  cost  of  1  yd.=J_    of  $.90. 

The  cost  of  1  yd.  therefore— 100 X  -L-  of  $.90 — $.72. 

.123^  of  $.72— $.09,  gain  on  1  yd. 
$.72-f$.09— =$.81,  selling  price  per  yd. 
(14) 
4%  of  $4896—*$  195. 84,  commission   for  selling  wheat 
$4896-~$195.84=$4700.16,  the  amount   to  be  invested 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 


79 


in  dry  goods. 

But  the  amount  also  contains  his  commission  of  2%    for 

buying. 

Then  $4700.16=102%  of  the  sum  actually  spent  in  dry 
goods,  or  for  each  $1.02  only  $1.00  was  spent  in  dry  goods. 

$4700. 16-j-$l. 02=4608,  the  number  of  dollars  spent  in 
buying  dry  goods. 

$4700.16 — $4608=$92.16,  the  commission  on  the  dry 
goods  purchase. 

$195.84+ $92.16=$288,  total  commission. 


CIVICS — Answers. 
By   H.   Ambrose   Perrln,   Superintendent  of   Schools,   Lincoln,    III. 


There  are  twenty-four  "principal  meridians  in  the  United  States." 
In  diagram  I,  line  NS  is  taken  as  a  principal  meridian.  A  true 
parallel  of  latitude  is  established  as  the  "base  line"— WE.     On  each 


w 


3 

A 

2 

1 

I 

1__J 

77 
11 

I 

F 


1 

!         i 

| 

0) 


1)03 


aAJL 


side  of  the  base  line  and  of  the  meridian  line,  at  intervals  of  six 
miles,  are  "township  lines."  Township  A  is  known  as  Township 
3  North,  Range  II  East  of  (said)   Principal  Meridian. 

Each  township  is  divided   into  thirty-six  one-mile   squares  called 
sections."   They  are  numbered  consecutively  beginning  with  the  upper 
right   hand   corner   section   and   ending   with    the   lower   right   hand 
corner  section.    Diagram  III. 


so 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 


Each  section,  as  shown  in  diagram  IV,  is  divided  into  parts  for 
the  convenient  description  of  land.  Diagram  IV  represents  section 
twenty  one  of  diagram  III.  The  portion  marked  X  is  known  as  "SW& 
of  SE1^  of  Section  Twenty-one,  Township  3  North,  Range  II  East 
of  (said)   Principal  Meridian.     (This  locates  it  in  diagram  I.) 


& 

s 

k 

3 

5 

! 

*-7 

f 

? 

10 

// 

1% 

\is 

17 

u 

IS 

/» 

13 

19 

36 

X 

%x 

33 

24- 

.30 

Z!? 

28 

2.7 

H 

2^ 

37 

32 

33 

34 

3$ 

c36 

^3) 


N^ 

sw 

'A 

xl 

Diagram  II  represents  the  establishment  of  correction  lines  to 
make  allowance  for  the  convergence  of  meridians  as  they  approach 
the  pole. 

2.  The  Constitution  of  the  United  States  may  be  amended  (1) 
By  two-thirds  vote  of  both  houses,  Congress  may  propose  to  the 
several  states,  amendments  to  the  Constitution;  (2)  upon  the  ap- 
plication of  two-thirds  of  the  states,  Congress  must  call  a  convention 
of  delegates  from  the  several  states  for  the  purpose  of  proposing 
amendments.  In  either  case  the  amendment  becomes  a  part  of  the 
Constitution  when  ratified  by  three-fourths  of  the  several  states — by 
legislatures   or   conventions   as   proposed   by   Congress. 

States  shall  net  enter  into  alliances  or  treaties  with  other 
states  or  countries  without  the  consent  of  Congress;  no  state  shall 
levy  duties,  imports  or  exports  without  the  consent  of  Congress,  and 
the  proceeds  from  such  when  collected  shall  be  for  the  national 
treasury;  no  state  shall  maintain  an  army  or  navy  in  time  of  peace. 

3.  An  absolute  monarchy  is  that  form  of  government  in  which 
absolute  power  is  vested  in  one  monarch.  The  Roman  Republic  had 
frequent  recourse  to  this  form  of  government. 

A  limited  monarchy  is  that  form  of  government  in  which  the 
powers  of  the  ruler  are  limited  by  the  Constitution  or  bylaws. 
Example,  England. 

A  pure  democracy  is  that  form  of  government  in  which  the  laws 
are  enacted  by  the  whole  body  of  people.  Such  a  government  is 
adapted  only  to  small  societies  or  to  narrow  territories.  Example, 
Athens  was  a  democracy  of  the  purest  type. 

A  republic  is  that  form  of  government  in  which  the  sovereign 
power  rests  in  the  whole  body  of  the  people  and  is  exercised  by 
representatives   elected  by  them.     Example,   United  States. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  ROOK.  81 

4.  The  school  officers  of  a  township  are:  Three  school  trustees, 
one  elected  annually  for  a  term  of  three  years — elected  on  the  second 
Saturday  of  April  (except  where  the  school  township  is  identical  with 
the  town,  civil  township)  in  which  case  the  election  is  on  the  date 
of  the  town  election — first  Tuesday  in  April;  one  township  treas- 
surer  who  is  appointed  by  the  trustees  for  a  term  of  three  years. 

The  chief  duties  of  the  trustees  are:  (1)  Appoint  a  township  treas- 
urer; (2)  divide  the  township  into  school  districts;  (3)  apportion 
school  funds  among  the  districts  of  the  township;  (4)  act  as  cus- 
todian of  the  school  property  of  the  township. 

The  chief  duties  of  the  township  treasurer  are:  (1)  Act  as  Clerk 
of  Board  of  Trustees;  (2)  custodian  of  school  moneys  of  township; 
(3^  make  annual  and  semi-annual  reports  of  conditions  and  finances 
to  trustees;  (4)  report  such  matters  to  the  County  Superintendent 
of  schools  as  his  report  to  the  State  Superintendent  of  Public  In- 
struction may  demand;  (5)  make  semi-annual  itemized  account  re- 
port to  the  clerk  of  each  school  district. 

5.  Bribery  is  the  offense  of  influencing  or  attempting  to  influ 
ence  the  action  of  any  one  in  the  performance  of  a  public  duty  by 
offering  or  promising  any  personal  gain. 

Perjury  is  the  criminal  offense  of  knowingly  giving  false  testi- 
mony in  judicial  proceedings. 

A  civil  suit  is  a  suit  brought  against  a  person,  company  or  cor- 
poration, called  the  defendant,  by  another  person,  company  or  cor- 
poration, called  the  plaintiff,  for  the  purpose  of  compelling  the  de- 
fendant to  pay  the  plaintiff  a  sum  of  money,  or  to  give  up  to  him 
certain  property. 

Tenure  of  office  means  the  length  of  time  for  which  the  person 
is  elected   or  appointed. 

Writ  of  habeas  corpus  (see  question  5  of  July  set). 

6.  Congressional  districts  are  the  districts  into  which  the  state 
legislature  divides  the  state  for  the  purpose  of  electing  representa- 
tives to  Congress.  Each  district  is  to  contain  as  nearly  as  possible 
the  Congressional  ratio   (see  question  10  of  the  July  set). 

At  the  frst  session  after  the  decennial  census,  the  General  As- 
sembly divides  the  state  into  51  senatorial  districts  from  each  of 
which  three  representatives  and  one  senator  are  elected  to  the  legis- 
lature. These  districts  are  to  be  formed  of  contiguous  and  compact  ter 
ritory  and  bounded  by  county  lines.  No  district  can  contain  less  than 
four-fifths  of  the  senatorial  ratio  (found  by  dividing  the  state  popu- 
lation by  51).  A  large  county  containing  not  less  than  one  and 
three-fourths  of  the  senatorial  ratio  may  be  divided  into  separate 
districts. 

In  dividing  the  number  representing  the  population  of  each 
state  by  the  Congressional  ratio  (see  question  10  July),  fractions  oc- 
cur in  nearly  every  case  and  the  sum  of  the  integral  quotients  will 
be  less  than  the  whole  number  required.  To  correct  this,  the  states 
having  the  largest  fractions  are  allowed  an  additional  representative 
er-rh  until  the  numbers  provided  for  is  secured.  This  extra  Congress- 
man is  called  Congressman-At-Large  and  is  elected  by  the  voters  of 
the  entire  state. 


82  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

7.  Aims  in  teaching  civics:  (1)  To  train  future  voters  for  exer- 
cising their  duties  as  citizens  in  a  meaningful  way;  (2)  to  make 
government  really  representative  thru  enlightened  voters;  (3)  to 
instill  the  ideas  of  privileged  duties  and  responsibilities  resting  with 
the  voters  of  the  land;  4)  to  inculcate  a  spirit  of  co-operation  and 
helpfulness  toward  government  affairs;  (5)  to  give  information  con- 
cerning the  actual  practical  workings  of  representative  governments 
as  we  have  them. 

8.  The  three  departments  of  government  are:  (1)  Legislative 
which  has  to  do  with  making  the  laws;  (2)  judicial  which  has  to  do 
with  interpreting  the  laws;  (3)  executive  which  has  to  do  with  the 
oversight  of  the  enforcement  of  the  laws. 

9.  A  Congressman  must  be  25  years  of  age,  7  years  a  citizen  of 
the  United  States,  and,  when  elected,  a  resident  of  the  state  from 
which  he  is  chosen.  His  term  is  two  years.  He  is  chosen  by  the 
direct  vote  of  the  Congressional  district.  A  state  may  have  as  many 
Congressmen  as  the  state  population  is  times  the  Congressional  ratio 
(see  question  10  July). 

A  Senator  must  be  30  years  of  age,  9  years  a  resident  of  the 
United  States,  and  a  citizen  of  the  state  from  which  he  is  chosen. 
The  term  of  office  is  six  years.  He  is  elected  by  the  direct  vote  of 
the  people  of  the  state.     Each  state  is  entitled  to  two  Senators. 

10.  The  town  officers  are:  Supervisor,  clerk,  assessor,  collector, 
highway  commissioners,  justices  of  the  peace  and  constables  (others 
may  be  added). 

The  supervisor  receives  and  pays  out  all  funds  for  the  expense 
of  the  town  except  for  road  and  bridge  purposes,  represents  the 
town   on  the  county  board,   and  is   overseer  of   the  poor. 

The  clerk  is  custodian  of  all  records,  books  and  papers  of  the 
town,  keeps  a  record  of  the  proceedings  of  all  town  meetings,  certifies 
to  the  county  clerk  on  or  before  the  second  Tuesday  of  August,  the 
amount  of  taxes  to  be  raised  for  town  purposes. 

The  assessor  must  deliver  to  the  county  clerk  a  record  of  the 
assessed  valuation  of  every  property  holder  in  the  town. 

The  collector  collects  the  taxes  of  the  town  and  pays  them  over 
to  the  proper  officers. 

There  are  three  highway  commissioners.  They  elect  one  of  their 
number  treasurer  who  receives  all  moneys  collected  in  the  town  for 
road  and  bridge  purposes  and  who  pays  out  the  same  upon  the  order 
of  any  two  commissioners. 

The  justices  of  the  peace  may  try  civil  suits  when  the  amount 
in  dispute  is  less  than  $200  and  all  cases  of  misdemeanor,  when 
punishable  by  a  fine,  all  cases  of  assault,  and  assault  and  battery. 

11.  A  senator,  representative,  supreme  judge  or  a  vice-president 
may  be  removed  from  office  only  upon  conviction  by  impeachment. 

12.  (See  question  12  of  July  set.) 

13.  The  U.  S.  Judicial  Courts  are:  Supreme  Court.  Circuit  Court 
of  Appeals,  Circuil   Courts,   District   Courts,  Court   of  Claims. 

The  Illinois  Courts  are:  Supreme  Court,  Appellate  Court,  Circuit 
Court,  Probate  Court,  County  Court,  Justice  of  the  Peace. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION   BOOK.  83 

14.  Bills  for  revenue  shall  originate  in  the  house  of  representa- 
tives, but  the  senate  may  propose  or  concur  with  amendments.  This 
provision  is  made  because  the  members  of  the  house  are  (were) 
the  only  direct  representatives  of  the  people  who  should  control  the 
public  purse.  At  least,  representatives  must  stand  accountable  every 
two  years  while  the  senators  are  accountable  to  the  people  by  elec- 
tion only   every  six  years. 


STATE  COURSE  OF  STUDY. — Answers. 

By  Charles  Mcintosh,  Superintendent  Piatt  County  Schools 
and  Editor  Illinois  State  Course  of  Study. 


1.  The  advantages  of  a  plan  of  alternation  for  our  country 
schools  are: 

(a)  Reduces  greatly  the  number  of  classes  it  is  necessary  to 
organize  in  a  country  school. 

(b)  By  reducing  the  number  of  classes  necessary,  it  makes 
possible  a  longer  recitation  period,  and  thus  gives  the 
teacher  a  better  opportunity  to  present  the  work  and  test 
results. 

(c)  In  the  smaller  country  schools  many  of  the  classes  arc 
too  small.  A  class  with  but  one  pupil  cannot  be  as  in- 
teresting as  a  class  with  five  or  six.  Alternation  helps 
to  make  classes  large  enough  to  be  interesting,  develop? 
more  of  the  spirit  of  competition  and  emulation  and  leads 
to  better  work. 

(  d )    Increases  the  teacher's  efficiency  by  lessening  the  num- 
ber of  recitations  for  which  he  must  prepare  each  day. 
The  most  important  disadvantages  are: 

ta)  It  puts  children  of  different  ages  and  different  degrees 
of  mental  development  together  making  it  more  difficult 
to  keep  the  class  working  as  a  unit. 

(b)  It  sometimes  requires  the  taking  up  of  subject  matte** 
out  of  the  natural  and  logical  order. 

(c)  In  larger  country  schools,  the  alternation  of  studies 
makes  the  classes  too  large  to  be  handled  effectively. 

2.  There  should  be  five  classes  in  reading  in  a  country  school, 
and  under  ordinary  conditions  only  five.  The  third  and  fourth 
year  classes  may  and  should  be  combined;  likewise  the  fifth  and 
sixth;  likewise  the  seventh  and  eighth.  The  classes  to  organize 
then  are  one  in  each  of  the  readers  as  follows:  First,  Second,  Third, 
Fourth,  Fifth.  The  plan  by  which  the  third  and  fourth  year  classes 
may  be  combined  is  for  the  pupils  to  read  a  third  reader  of  one 
series  in  the  third  year,  and  a  third  reader  of  another  series  in  the 
fourth  year.  In  this  way  two  third  readers  are  read  in  the  class. 
In  the  same  way,  the  fifth  year  class  should  read  a  fourth  reader  of 
one  series  and  the  sixth  year  class  a  fourth  reader  of  another  ser- 
ies; the  seventh  year  class  a  fifth  reader  of  one  series  and  the 
eighth  year  class  a  fifth  reader  of-  another  series. 


84  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

3.  The  useful  purposes  served  by  an  examination  system  are 
as  follows: 

(1)  Provides  a  stimulus  for  reviewing  and  organizing  the 
materials  which  have  been  taught  during  the  term  or 
year. 

(2)  The  examination  is  in  itself  a  review  exercise  of  no 
mean  value. 

( 3 )  Furnishes  a  test  of  the  efficiency  of  the  teaching. 

(4)  May  be  looked  upon  by  the  pupil  as  a  partial  te;t  of 
his  efficiency  in  school  work. 

For  discussion  of  these  purposes,  see  pages  14-15,  State 
Course. 

4.  Stories  should  first  be  told  by  the  teacher  as  dramatically  as 
possible.  It  is  not  wise  to  read  stories  to  the  class  in  the  language 
recitation.  The  facial  expression  and  the  direct  glance  of  the 
teacher  is  a  most  valuable  aid  in  impressing  the  hearers.  The  sto- 
ries should  be  retold  by  the  children  several  times,  after  which, 
they  may  be  illustrated  by  the  children. 

The  poem  should  be  read  as  a  whole,  to  the  children  in  the  best 
possible  form.  By  means  of  oral  explanations,  the  teacher  should 
seek  to  create  a  series  of  vivid  images  embodying  the  meaning  of 
the  poem.  Quaint  or  unusual  phrasing  should  be  pointed  out;  the 
thought  of  rhythm  should  be  accented  or  emphasized  in  the  teach- 
er's oral  rendition.  Blackboard  sketches  may  be  made  to  summarize 
the  meaning  of  each  stanza.  Following  this,  the  pupil  may  mem- 
orize the  poem. 

Dramatization  is  the  most  powerful  aid  in  securing  excellent 
expression  in  oral  forms.  In  dramatizing,  the  pupils  are  question- 
ed to  bring  out  the  different  characters  in  the  story  and  what  each 
one  does,  then  children  should  be  selected  to  represent  each  of  tha 
characters  needed.  The  play  should  then  proceed.  When  it  is  fin- 
ished, the  children  criticise  the  manner  in  which  it  was  done,  and 
efforts  should  be  made  to  improve  the  dramatization  at  subsequent 
repetitions. 

5.  Foot  rules  with  inches  divided  into  eighths. 

Card  board  strips  1"  by  2",  1"  by  3",  1"  by  4",  1"  by   6". 

Inch  squares  of  pasteboard,     2  0  for  each  pupil. 

One  thousand  match  sticks  four  inches  long. 

One  box  of  toy  money. 

A  set  of  grocer's  tea  scales,  with  iron  weights  1  oz.  to  16  oz. 

A  set  of  cards  4"  by  6"  with  dots  like  dominoes  showing  the 

combination  of  two  numbers  up  to  10  plus  10. 
A  similar  set  of  cards  with  figures  instead  of  dots. 

6.  His   early  training  in  reading  did  not  give  him  a  sufficient 

mastery  over  the  phonetic  side  of  his  work. 

He  learned  to  read  a  word  at  a  time. 

He  has  never  learned  to  let  his  eye  take  in  larger  groupings 
of  words  so  that  he  may  run  ahead  and  catch  the  mean- 
ing. 

He  has  worked  with  the  formal  side  so  long  that  reading  is 
drudgery    of    the    hardest    kind    for   him. 

Some  of  the  plans  to  help  these  readers  are  as  follows: 

Read  silently  for  the  thought. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  85 

Practice  reading  groups  of  words,  phrases,  and  clauses. 
Give  analysis  of  subject  matter  with  the  aid  of  the  teacher. 
Answering   questions   upon   the   thought   of   the   selection  in 

the  words  of  the  text  at  times. 
Telling  orally  what  has  been  read  silently. 

7.  Construction  work   gives: 
Quickness  of  perception. 
Power  of  concentration. 
Intellectual  grasp. 

Helps  to  give  number  work  that  high  degree  of  mental  dis- 
cipline which  it  is  so  well  calculated  to  afford. 
Adds  to  the  interest  and  pleasure  of  the  number  work. 
The   basic   principles   involved    are:    Cutting,    representative   con- 
struction, box  making,   book   making,   apparatus  making,   weaving, 
decorative  construction. 

8.  Rain,  work  of  water,  weather,  human  types,  soil,  sky  stu- 
dies, trees. 

9.  Sewing  in  the  fifth  and  sixth  grades,  cooking  in  the  seventh 
and  eighth  grades. 

The  purpose  of  such  course  is: 

a.      To   connect  closely   the  school  and  home. 

Review   the  topics   presented   in   this   work   in   the   earlier 

grades  in  the  nature  study  work. 
Centralize   all    this    work    around    the    two    leading    indus- 
tries   that    are    carried    on    in    the    home — -sewing    and 
cooking. 
It  is  suggested  that  two  lessons  of  ninety  minutes  each  be  given 
each   month,   taking  the   time   after   recess   on   the   first   and   third 
Fridays  of  each  month. 

10.  The  composition  in  the  seventh  and  eighth  years  is  to  be 
taught  in  connection  with  the  grammar.  There  is  a  specific  pur- 
pose in  the  composition  work  of  each  month,  this  purpose  to  be  in 
the  pupil's  minds  as  well  as  the  teacher's.  This  purpose  should 
not  be  lost  sight  of  next  month,  but  whatever  of  knowledge  about 
sentence  structure  is  gained  one  month,  should  be  used  ever  after- 
wards. A  fair  proportion  of  the  composition  should  be  oral,  the 
teacher  taking  advantage  of  the  opportunities  for  oral  composition 
offered  in  the  recitations  in  other  subjects.  Written  themes  should 
be  given  occasionally,  on  subjects  carefully  assigned,  but  not  writ- 
ten until  the  subject  had  been  carefully  gone  over  in  the  class. 
Each  composition  should  be  definitely  criticised  by  teacher  after 
it  is  prepared.  Five  minute  themes  upon  one  subject  are  excel- 
lent for  drill  in  sentence  structure.  Written  work  in  other  sub- 
jects should  be  good  composition  in  matter  and  form. 

11.  Shape  of  picture  in  connection  with  subject  depicted,  what 
the  center  of  interest  is,  where  it  is  placed  in  the  picture,  why  it  is 
so  placed,  and  what  means  the  artist  has  used  to  call  attention  to 
the  center  of  interest. 

Example: 

Lepage's  Joan  of  Arc. — 

Shape,     Nearly  square,  high  to  give  depth  to  picture  so  vision. 
could  fte  repr'esfentte'd  in  background. 


86  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

Center  of  Interest.     Girl. 

Where  placed.     In  foreground  and  at  side  of  picture. 

Why   so  placed.      To   make  prominent,   to   leave  space  at  side 
for  representation  of  vision. 

Means    used   by   artist   to   call   attention   to   center   of   interest. 

Placed  in  foreground,  light  falls  full  upon  face  and  upper 
part  of  body,  other  things  in  the  picture  subdued  and 
not  plainly  marked  out. 
12.  The  school  is  concerned  in  the  education  of  the  whole  child, 
hence  it  should  be  interested  in  what  the  child  does  outside  of 
school.  His  home  activities  should  help  the  school,  and  his  school 
activities  should  help  with  his  home  duties.  Each  child  needs  ac- 
tual contact  with  nature  and  natural  things.  He  needs  to  study 
the  various  activities  about  him  on  the  farm.  Organizations  of 
pupils  interested  in  the  same  thing  help  in  the  accomplishment  of 
that  thing  for  each  of  them.  Boy's  and  Girl's  Clubs  are  formed 
primarily  to  study  farm  activities.  They  furnish  opportunities  for 
social  intercourse  on  a  high  plane,  they  furnish  opportunities  for 
developing  power  in  initiative,  for  working  hand  and  brain  at  the 
same  time,  for  cultivating  the  power  of  working  with  other  people, 
for  effective  team  work  of  a  district  or  locality.  There  can  be  a  lo- 
cal organization  in  each  district  with  the  teacher  as  manager,  a 
pupil  as  president,  another  as  secretary.  Meetings  can  be  held  once 
each  month  for  discussion  and  explanation  of  practical  work  under- 
taken, for  literary  exercises,  etc.  These  clubs  should  be  affiliated 
with  the  township  and  county  clubs  and  with  the  Farmers'  Insti- 
tute and  the  Domesitc  Science  Association,  the  boys  clubs  with  the 
former,  and  girls'  clubs  with  the  latter. 


ORTHOGRAPHY— Answers. 


By    Elmer    W.    Cavins,    Teacher    of    Orthography    and    Penmanship 
Illinois  State  Normal  University. 

1.  A  hymonym  is  a  word  having  the  same  sound  as  another,  but 
differing  from  it  in  meaning;  as  beach  and  beech;  canvas  and  can- 
vass. 

A  suffix  is  a  significant  syllable  joined  to  the  end  of  a  word, 
as  manly,  fertile,  patronize. 

A  trisyllable  is  a  word  of  three  syllables;  as,    po-et-ry. 

A  diphthong  is  a  union  of  two  vowel  sounds  in  one  syllable, 
as  ou  in  found,  and  oi  in  toilers 

A  derivative  word  is  a  word  formed  from  a  primitive  word 
by  changing  it  internally,  or  by  adding  a  prefix  or  suffix;  as,  men, 
suffix,  strikers. 


glad 

lettuce 

ivy 

owe 

unit 

chair 

there 

silver 

oxen 

study- 

carpet 
caught 

early 
obey 

whirl 
.  machine 

order 
move 

burn 
rule 

IjULiNOiS  STATE   QUESTION  BOOK.  S7 

3.      post,  after;   as  in  postscript,  postpone,      (in  some  words  post 
means  put  or  place  as  in  impost. 

inter,  between,  among;  as  in  intercede,  intersect. 


poi,>,  many;  as  in  polygamy,  polynomial. 


mono,  one,  single,  sole;  as  in  monotone,  monoply, 


cede,  go,  yield;  as  in  antecedent,  secede. 


diet,  speak,  say,  tell;  as  in  contradict,  verdict. 


fleet,  bend,  turn;  as  in  reflect,  iiiiiect. 


polis,  city;   as  in  metropolis,  HOopoEs. 
rupt,  break;  as  in  eruption,  bankrupt. 


anti,  against;  as  in  antipathy,  antidote. 

4.  acorn,  a'korn    or    a'kern;    arctic,    ark'tik;    fatigue,    fa  teg'; 
tortoise,  tor'tusor  tor 'tis;  pedagogy,  ped'  a  go  ji  ;  bronchitis, 
bron  ki'  tis;  routine,  roo  ten';   suicide,  su'  i  sid;   recall,  re  kol' 

bureau,  bu'  ro. 

5.  scent,  smell,   odor,  fragrance. 
unite,  join,  combine,  connect. 
scorn,  sneer,  disdain,  contempt. 
soothe,  calm,  quiet,  pacify. 
scene,  view,  sight,  display. 

6.  Coral  reefs  are  abundant  in  the  West  Indies,  but  none  exist  on 
the  western  coast  of  the  two  Americas. 

The  choral  club  meets  twice  a  week. 

The  first  word  of  every  sentence  should  begin  with  a  capital 
letter. 

The  corner  stone  of  our  national  capitol  was  laid  in  1793  and 
the  building  completed  in  182  7. 

The  vessel  is  unloading  at  the  quay. 

The  Thousand  Isles  are  situated  in  the  St.  Lawrence  River  near 
Lake  Ontario. 

The  mark  called  a  caret  resembles  the  letter  v  inverted. 

Diamonds   and   other   precious  stones   are  estimated   in   carats 
and  fractions  of  carats. 

The  Statue  of  Liberty  is  at  the  entrance  to  New  York  harbar. 

In  the  United  States  each  state  has  a  "statute  of  frauds"  to 
prevent  many  fraudulent  practices. 
1.       biped — bi,  two;  ped,  foot. 

A  two-footed  animal,   as  man.      "Man   has  been   defined  as   a 

biped  without  feathers". — Duke  of  Argyll, 
subscription — sub,  under;   script  write;  ion,  act  of. 

Act  of  writing'  one's  name  under,  or  below;  as,  under  an  order 

for  a  periodical.     A  sum  subscribed  or  promised;  as,  his  sub- 
scription to  the  new  church  building. 
secede— se,  aside;  cede,  go. 

To  go  aside;  to  separate.  - 


88  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

South  Carolina  was  the  first  state  to  secede  from  the  Union. 

autograph — auto,  self;  graph,  write. 

One's  own  handwriting;  especially,  one's  name  written  by  him 
self. 

Billie  Burke,  an  actress  of  some  note,  has  recently  been  selling 
her  picture  and  autograph  for  one  dollar,  and  giving  the  money 
to  the  Belgians. 

circumscribe— circum,  around;  scribe,  write,  draw. 

To  draw  a  bounding  line  around;  hence  to  mark  out  the  limits 
oi;  to  restrict;  as,  to  circumscribe  the  power  of  royalty. 

liberate — liber,  free;  ate  (verb  ending) 

To  set  tree;  to  release  from  bondage;  as,  to  liberate  a  slave 
or  prisoner;  to  liberate  the  mind  from  prejudice. 

contradict — contra,  against;  diet,  speak. 

To  speak  against;  to  assert  the  opposite  of.  "Dear  Duff,  T  prithee 
contradict  thyself  and  say  it  is  not  so." — Shakespeare. 

paternal — pater,  father;  al,  pertaining  to. 

Pertaining  to  a  father;  fatherly;  as,  paternal  love. 

manufacture — manu,   hand;   fact,   make. 

(Formerly,  manufacture  meant  to  make  by  hand.)  To  make 
wares  or  other  products  by  hand,  by  machinery,  or  by  other 
agency;  as,  to  manufacture  cloth,  nails,  glass,  etc. 

transmission — trans,  across;  miss;  send;  ion,  act  of. 

the  act  of  sending  across  from  one  person  or  place  to  another; 
as,  the  transmission  of  letters,  news,  and  the  like. 


PEDAGOGY. — Answers. 

By   L.   P.   Frohardt,   Superintendent   of   Schools, 
Cranite   City,   Illinois. 


1.  Five  aims  in  Public  School  Education. 

(a.)  To  awaken  and  develop  the  dormant  potentialities  of  the 
child  mind,  (b)  to  give  the  child  the  power  to  interpret  symbolic 
speech  correctly  so  that  the  storehouse  of  knowledge  found  in  the 
literature  of  all  ages  may  become  his  heritage,  (c)  To  supply  him 
with  a  fund  of  correct  habits  so  he  may  live  a  correct  social  life 
among  other  civilized  beings,  (d)  To  supply  him  with  a  fund  of 
knowledge  so  that  he  may  have  a  basis  for  determining  facts  and 
principles  for  correct  judgments  that  will  be  necessary  in  solving 
the  problems  of  civilized  ideals  and  standards  that  are  to  be  the 
criteria  by  which  his  conduct  is  to  be  moulded.  These  must  be  col- 
ored with  emotion  to  become  corrective  of  his  conduct. 

The  whole  may  be  briefly  summed  up  in  the  true  and  ulti- 
mate aim  of  education,  viz.;  to  equip  the  child  most  completely  for 
his  highest  possible  degree  of  social  efficiency. 

2.  A  prompt  and  vigorous  attack  of  any  undertaking  inspires 
confidence,  while  a  poor  beginning  weakens  confidence,  and  caus- 
es wrong  and  dilatory,  habits  to  become  established  before  work 
gets  under  full  headway. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  89 

A  right  start  is  when  everything  starts  off  the  first  day  with 
little  or  no  friction  or  delay,  and  practically  every  item  of  daily 
routine  initiated  and  every  class  organized  and  having  received 
specific  assignment  of  work  for  following  day. 

3.  A  weak-kneed  principal  or  soft-hearted  teacher  may  cause 
an  unruly  pupil  to  become  a  standing  source  of  disorder  to  the  en- 
tire school  and  the  unruly  pupil  himself  may  ultimately  receive 
greater  punishment,  possibly  even  fatal  to  him,  when,  on  account  of 
his  unsocial  conduct  which  the  weak-hearted  teacher  allowed  to 
become  habituated  in  school,  society  must  correct  with  the  most 
rigid  severity  in  the  deprivation  of  the  liberty  or  even  the  life  of 
the  offender. 

A  young  teacher  just  from  college  began  her  school  and  tried 
to  run  it  on  the  "soft  pedagogy"  theory.  Harshness  or  sternness 
were  to  her  mind  unnecessary  arid  out  of  place.  It  was  but  a  day 
or  two  and  several  boys  began  to  make  matters  rather  lively  for 
her.  Her  principal  found  it  out  and  called  her  attention  to  the 
fact  that  she  must  change  their  conduct. 

She  said  she  was  going  to  win  them  by  love.  The  boys  soon 
"caught  on",  and  a  merry  time  was  theirs.  She  talked  to  the 
boys  in  endearing  terms  and  cried  over  their  misbehavior.  Mat- 
ters went  from  bad  to  worse  till  her  principal  told  her  she  must 
either  get  better  results  in  discipline  at  once  or  he  would  have  to 
get  someone  who  could.  A  hint  as  to  the  manner  in  which  this 
might  be  brought  about  was  also  dropped.  The  suggestion  was 
followed  out  and  he  stood  by  while  the  remedy  was  applied  to  see 
that  It  was  effectually  done.  This  was  the  turning  point  in  this 
teacher's  career.  Before  the  end  of  the  year  she  was  one  of  the 
most  successful  of  his  teachers.  The  love  theory  was  not  set  aside 
but  only  changed  in  the  manner  in  which  it  was  applied.  Hickory 
oil  or  strap  oil  are  at  times  very  efficacious,  especially  in  extreme 
cases,  and  the  remedies  are  not  at  all  at  variance  with  the  true  love 
theory. 

4.  Preparing  for  "First  day  of  School." 

(a)  Make  a  visit  to  the  building  to  acquaint  yourself  with  its 
general  arrangements  and  conditions,  the  location  of  wardrobes, 
closets,  exits,  etc.  (h)  Have  on  hand  a  proper  supply  of  materials 
of  all  kinds  at  least  for  the  first  day.  (c)  Get  names  of  pupils  and 
list  of  classes  from  predecessor  and,  if  possible,  a  statement  of  the 
work  done  by  the  predecessor  in  each  of  the  classes,  and  a  copy  of 
each  of  the  text  books  used  (d>  Construct  a  tentative  program  and 
make  a  general  plan  for  the  passing  of  lines  and  the  general  routine 
of  the  school,  (e)  If  in  a  graded  school,  meet  the  principal  be- 
forehand and  get  suggestions  from  him  about  your  work  and  the  re- 
quirements of  the  school. 

5.  If  in  a  country  school,  I  would  get  from  the  records  of  the 
preceding  year  a  list  of  the  number  and  kinds  of  classes,  and  from 
this  and  the  present  apparent  needs  construct  my  program,  con- 
solidating classes  as  far  as  practicable  and  give  to  each  class  its 
proper  proportion  of  time  according  to  the  importance  and  size  of 
the  class. 

If  in  a  village  or  city  graded  school  I  would  endeavor  to  get  a 
copy  of  last  year's  program  of  the  same  gratfe  I  am  to  teach.     I 


90  ILUNQ1S  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

would  follow  this  to  the  extent  it  would  appeal  to  me  as  practical 
and  make  such  re-arrangements  as  would  seem  needful,  arid, 
having  drawn  up  a  tentative  program,  1  would  submit  it  to  the 
principal  for  suggestions  or  corrections.  1  would  then  endeavor 
to  carry  out  this  program  on  the  very  first  day,  making  only  such 
changes  thereafter  as  occasion  might  demand. 

6.  There  should  be  sufficient  light  in  every  school  room,  about 
one-fifth  of  the  area  of  the  flloor  space,  and  the  light  should,  if 
possible,  come  from  the  left  side.  Front  light  should  always  be 
avoided.  Curtains  should  be  provided  and  regulated  according  to 
the  amount  of  light  obtainable,  partly  cut  off  on  bright  days  and 
the  full  amount  on  cloudy  days. 

Ink  should  be  jet  black,  not  pale  or  blue,  and  the  paper  should 
be  a  dead  white,  not  glossy,  or  of  some  gray  or  yellowish  tint.  Dead 
white  paper  and  jet  black  ink  are  generally  most  practicable. 

Pencils  should  be  of  proper  length,  of  good  material  and  prop- 
erly sharpened.  , 

Distance  of  reading  matter  from  the  eye  should  be  about  four- 
teen or  fifteen  inches. 

7.  Good  order  is  secured  by  constant  vigilance  and  seeing  that 
all  are  constantly  and  properly  employed.  Idleness  is  a  prolific 
source  of  disorder.  The  teacher  herself  must  be  quiet  and  com- 
posed and  not  loud  and  blustering  in  her  manner.  Any  appear- 
ance of  disorder  should  be  promptly  checked.  The  teacher  must  be 
resourceful  and  tactful  to  have  good  order. 

8.  Corporal  punishment  is  very  liable  to  be  used  injudicious- 
ly and  indiscriminately.  Unless  properly  administered  it  aggra- 
vates rather  than  corrects  the  evil.  It  is  also  liable  to  cause  legal 
proceedings  against  the  teacher  by  resentful  parents,  if  the  pun- 
ishment were  severe,  and  this  causes  unpleasant  notoriety;  and  if 
the  teacher  should  lose  the  case  it  would  practically  end  her  use- 
fulness in  that  school. 

If  corporal  punishment  is  administered  judiciously  and  under 
proper  conditions  it  may  be  the  quickest  and  most  direct  and  short- 
est method  of  correcting  an  evil.  While  frequent  and  indiscrim- 
inate corporal  punishment  may  be  a  sign  of  weakness  on  the  part 
of  the  teacher,  totally  refraining  from  it  may  also  be  a  sign  of 
weakness.  If  all  other  means  have  faiied  it  should  be  resorted 
to  In  a  judicious  way. 

9.  Questions  of  the  kind  indicated  are  not  thought-provoking 
and  can  be  answered  by  a  single  word  instead  of  a  complete  sen- 
tence. 

It  would  be  better  to  ask  the  pupil  to  give  a  brief  account  of 
the  discovery  of  America.  Give  a  brief  sketch  of  the  life  of  the 
discoverer.  Any  facts  not  brought  out  in  this  way  could  be  got- 
ten by  additional  questions,  but  the  pupil  should  be  given  an  op- 
portunity to  exercise  thought  and  to  display  originality. 

10.  The  teacher  should,  if  possible,  be  a  citizen  of  the  commun- 
ity in  which  he  teaches.  He  should  take  an  active  part  in  the  so- 
cial, civil,  religious,  and  commercial  interests  of  the  community. 
He  should  lead  or  take  part  in  anything  that  makes  for  the  bet- 
terment of  the  community  in  the  fullest  sense  of  the  word.  It 
may  not  be  best  to  be  an  active  politician,  in  the  sense  of  partisan 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  91 

politics,  but  he  should  have  deep  and  firm  convictions  and  dare 
to  express  them  tactfully  when  occasion  demands.  He  should  al- 
ways exercise  his  right  of  suffrage  and  vote  for  the  best  candidates 
as   far  as  he  understands   them. 


ELEMENTARY  SCIENCE. — Answers. 


By  A.  S.  Anderson,  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Mt.  Carmel,  111. 

1.  The  female  mosquito  possesses  a  piercing  stylet.  Certain 
species  of  mosquitoes  seeking  food  by  piercing  the  skin  of  a  per- 
son infected  with  malarial  or  yellow  fever,  is  able  to  carry  the  germs 
of  these  diseases  to  a  healthy  person. 

2.  Branches  containing  flower  buds  of  the  Jonathan  and  the 
Minkler  apple  tree  called  scions  are  grafted  on  a  growing  Ben 
Davis  Apple  tree  called  the  stock. 

The  many  methods  of  grafting  are  only  many  ways  of  doing  the 
samt  thing,  the  essential  of  which  is  first  to  carefully  match  the 
line  of  the  bark  and  wood  of  the  scion  to  the  stock  of  the  tree,  sec- 
ond, to  maintain  a  smooth  contact  with  careful  wrapping,  and  keep 
the  whole  wound  covered  with  grafting  wax  to  prevent  evaporation 
of  the  sap  of  the  tree.  Thus  it  is  possible  to  grow  Jonathan  and 
Minkler  apples  on  a  Ben  Davis  apple  tree. 

3.  No.  They  are  both  of  more  use  than  harm  to  growing  veg- 
etation, for  they  both  destroy  rodents  that  are  much  more  distruc- 
tive  to  crops.  The  crow  also  destroys  great  numbers  of  injurious 
insects. 

4.  Seed  corn  should  be  gathered  after  it  is  completely  filled  and 
before  frost.  After  seed  corn  is  gathered,  it  should  be  kept  from 
freezing  until  it  is  thoroly  dry.  It  should  therefore  be  kept  suspea fl- 
ed or  crated  in  such  a  manner  and  in  such  a  place  that  dry  and  tem- 
pered air  may  circulate  around  each  ear  of  the  corn  until  it  is  thor- 
oly dry. 

5.  Seeds  planted  in  the  spring  will  produce  onions  that  should 
be  planted  again  the  next  spring.  These  onions  will  then  produce 
seeds  at  the  end  of  the  second  season  alter  the  first  seeds  were 
planted.  If  onion  sets  are  planted  first,  onion  sets  will  be  produced 
at  the  end  of  the  second  season  instead  of  seeds. 

ij.  No.  Because  it  is  mainly  insectivorous.  The  trout  foot  is  enry 
broad  and  fully  webbed,  also  provided  with  strong  claws  adapted  for 
digging. 


92  ILLINOIS  S^ATK  QUESTION  BOOK. 

7.  For  flower  gardens  those  flowers  that  blossom  before  the  raid- 
die  of  June  or  after  the  first  of  September,  for  example,  nastur- 
tiums, violets  and  the  like.  For  vegetable  gardens  those  vegetables 
that  mature  for  use  before  the  middle  of  June,  for  example,  lettuce, 
radishes  and  the  like. 

8.  Any  wind  is  caused  by  inequality  of  atmospheric  pressure  of 
different  regions.  This  inequality  is  due  to  rise  of  temperature  of 
different  regions.  Air  that  is  heated  expands  and  being  lighter  it 
rises,  the  surrounding  heavier  air  is  pulled  by  gravity  into  the  place 
occupied  by  the  light  air.  This  causes  currents  of  air  or  wind.  The 
direction  of  a  wind  is  determined  by  the  relative  position  of  a  high 
pressure  region  and  a  low  pressure  region.  Fundamentally,  a  low 
pressure  area  east  of  a  high  pressure  area  will  cause  a  current  of 
air  to  flow  from  the  high  pressure  area  to  the  low  pressure  area  and 
produce  what  is  called  a  west  wind. 

A  barometer  is  an  instrument  used  to  measure  differences  in  air 
pressure.  The  most  common  forms  are  the  mercuric  barometer  and 
aneroid  barometer. 

9.  Black  soil  is  rich  in  organic  matter,  because  it  contains  hu- 
mus or  vegetable  mould.  For  this  reason  it  is  more  productive.  It 
is  more  easily  tilled,  because  it  never  becomes  so  compact  as  clay. 
Yellow  clay  soil  contains  little  or  no  organic  matter.  For  this  rea- 
son it  is  lacking  in  some  essential  elements  for  a  productive  soil. 
It  is  hard  to  till  because  it  is  compact  and  brittle  when  dry,  and 
plastic  and  tenacious  when  wet. 

10.  Both  are  rich  in  proteids  thus  being  very  valuable  as  fool 
for  animals. 

Both  harbor  bacteria  on  the  roots.  These  bacteria  form  nodules 
that  contain  nitrogenous  compounds.  Nitrogen  is  an  essential  for 
plant  growth.  Both  of  these  plants  are  valuable  in  restoring  nitro- 
gen to  the  soil  by  means  of  these  bacteria  and  thus  these  plants 
serve  as  fertilizers  to  soils  needing  nitrogen. 


PHYSIOLOGY— Answers. 
By  William    Hawkes,   Superintendent   of   Schools,    Litchfield,    III. 


1.  By  adulteration  of  food  is  meant  the  substituting  of  a  material 
of  inferior  quality  for  the  genuine,  or  the  addition  of-  some  foreign 
substance  for  preserving  purposes  or  to  give  to  the  substances  an 
added  value. 

Milk  to  which  water  has  been  added  or  from  which  cream  has 
been  extracted  is  a  somewhat  common  form  of  adulteration.  For- 
maldehyde is  sometimes  added  to  milk  to  preserve  it.  Coffee  when 
sold  in  the  ground  state,  may  be  chiefly  chicory,  beans,  barley,  wheat, 
or  peas.  Syrups  and  honey  are  often  adulterated  with  glucose  or 
cheaper  grade  syrups.  Candy  is  often  colored  by  harmful  coloring 
matter. 

2  The  spleen  is  a  gland  located  just  under  the  diaphram  to  the  teft 
of  the  stomach.  It  is  a  storehouse  of  nutritive  material,  and  a  de- 
stroyer of  Impurities.  The  worn  out  red  corpuscles  of  the  blood  are 
destroyed  in  it,  and  new  white  corpuscles  are  probably  created  there. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION   BOOK.  93 

Mouth  breathing  makes  deep  breathing  almost  impossible;  the 
air  taken  into  the  lungs  is  not  so  thoroly  warmed  or  strained  as 
it  is  when  taken  thru  the  nostrils;  the  mucous  membrane  of  the 
nose  of  a  mouth  breather  becomes  dry  and  shrinks,  decreasing  the 
circulation  and  inducing  nasal  catarrah;  it  gives  the  face  an  unpleas- 
ant appearance;  and  has  bad  effect  upon  the  voice,  giving  it  a  hard 
twang  and  robbing  it  of  its  pleasantness. 

The  cilia  are  hair  like  projections  of  protoplasm.  They  are 
found  in  the  epithelial  cells  of  the  air  passages  and  are  continually 
in  motion.  They  sweep  forward  with  a  rapid  movement  and  recover 
the  original  position  with  a  slower  movement.  They  thus  continu- 
ally sweep  toward  the  entrance  of  the  air  passages  particles  of  dust, 
etc.,  which  may  have  entered. 

3.  Saliva.  The  saliva  comes  from  the  parotid,  the  submaxillary,  and 
the  sublingual  salivary  glands.  The  parotid  glands  are  located  be- 
low and  in  front  of  the  ear  on  each  side  of  the  face,  the  submaxillary 
under  the  two  halves  of  the  lower  jaw,  and  the  sublingual  under- 
neath the  mucous  membrane  of  the  floor  of  the  mouth,  below  the 
tongue.  The  saliva  moistens  the  food  in  the  mouth  and  prepares  it 
for  8 wallowing,  and  also  changes  some  of  the  starch  of  the  food  into 
sugar. 

4.  The  circulatory  system  consists  of  the  heart,  the  arteries,  the 
capillaries,  and  the  veins.  The  heart  is  located  in  the  thoracic  cav- 
ity and  forces  the  blood  outward  on  its  journey  around  the  body. 
From  the  upper  portion  of  the  heart  arises  the  aorta,  the  chief  artery. 
This  artery  subdivides  or  sends  off  branches  until  all  parts  of  the 
body  have  been  reached. 

As  the  arteries  subdivide  and  send  off  more  and  more  branches 
they  become  smaller  and  smaller,  until  a  network  of  microscopical 
hair-like  tubes  is  formed,  reaching  every  portion  of  the  body.  These 
are  the  capillaries.  The  capillaries  then  unite  in  the  different  parts 
of  the  body,  becoming  larger  as  they  unite,  to  form  veins.  The  blood, 
forced  onward  by  the  pressure  of  other  blood  sent  out  by  the  heart,  is 
gathered  from  the  capillaries  into  the  veins,  and  carried  to  the  heart 
whence  it  is  forced  into  the  lungs.  When  a  particle  of  blood  reaches 
the  right  side  of  the  heart  from  the  veins  it  is  dark  purple  in  color 
and  contains  little  or  no  oxygen,  much  carbon  dioxide,  and  some 
other  body  wastes.  From  the  heart  the  blood  is  forced  into  the  lungs 
where  it  comes  into  contact  with  the  air  taken  in  by  breathing,  gives 
off  its  carbon  dioxide,  and  takes  on  a  fresh  supply  of  oxygen.  This 
changes  its  color  from  dark  purple  to  bright  red.  From  the  lungs 
the  blood  is  carried  to  the  left  sio>  of  the  heart  still  carrying  its  sup- 
ply of  oxygen  and  some  of  its  body  wastes.  From  the  heart  the 
blood  passes  to  all  parts  of  the  body.  As  it  passes  the  kidneys  and 
liver  the  wastes  are  removed  and  excreted  as  it  passes  the  capillaries 
of  the  stomach  and  intestines,  it  takes  on  some  of  the  prepared  food 
materials  and  carries  them  to  some  portion  of  the  body  where  the 
cells  are  at  work  and  where  oxidation  takes  places.  Here  the  oxygen 
of  the  blood  is  given  off  to  supply  the  energy  needed  in  oxidation,  the 
food  substances  are  given  up  to  he  built  into  new  tissue  to  repair 
that  broken,  carbon  dioxide,  formed  by  the  oxidation  of  the  tissue 


94  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

is  taken  on,  and  the  blood  begins  its  return  going  to  the  heart  and 
lungs  to  start  the  same  process  again. 

5.  The  brain,  spinal  cord,  and  nerves  arising  from  them  are  called 
the  central  nervous  system.  The  ganglion  and  nerves  arising  from 
them,  not  included  in  the  above,  are  the  Sympathetic  nervous  system. 

In  general  the  gray  matter  of  the  nervous  system  consists  of 
nerve  cells.  A  nerve  cell  is  composed  of  the  protoplasmic  cell  body 
with  its  cell  wall  and  branches.  These  branches  are  called  tlendrons 
or  dendrites  if  short  and  axons  if  they  are  long  and  put  the  coll  into 
communication  with  a  distant  part  of  the  body.  The  white  matter  of 
the  nervous  system  is  composed  mostly  of  nerve  fibers.  A  nerve 
fiber  consists  of  the  middle  core  or  axis  of  protoplasm,  and  two  sur- 
rounding sheaths  of  tissues.  The  central  axis  is  the  conducting  part 
of  the  nerve  fiber. 

6.  The  use  of  intoxicating  drinks  weakens  the  will  power  of  the 
user,  destroys  the  ability  or  desire  to  make  fine  moral  distinctions, 
weakens  the  intellectual  abilities,  and  has  a  general  harmful  effect 
upon  the  character. 

The  effect  of  the  contiuned  use  of  intoxicating  drinks  upon  the 
heart  is  to  caues  its  cells  to  undergo  a  fatty  degeneration  and  thus 
weaken  heart  action;  in  the  lungs  a  congested  condition  of  the  capil- 
laries is  produced  which  calls  for  more  oxygen;  the  increased  rate  of 
breathing  causes  a  greater  demand  on  the  muscles  and  the  digestive 
tissues,  and  thus  there  is  a  resultant  loss  to  the  body  of  both  energy 
and  heat. 

The  result  of  intoxicating  drinks  upon  the  brain  may  be  inferred 
from  the  fact  that  experiments  where  large  doses  of  alcohol  have 
been  used,  invariably  indicate  that  the  "reaction  time"  is  lengthened. 
Many  large  corporations  have  forbidden  the  use  of  alcoholic  bever- 
ages among  their  employers  because  of  the  recognized  fact  of  im- 
paired efficiency. 

7.  By  oxidation  is  meant  the  chemical  combination  of  oxygen  with 
some  other  substance.  Within  the  muscles  of  the  body  are  stored 
up  carbohydrates,  proteids,  fats,  and  oxygen.  Under  proper  condi- 
tion the  cell  brings  about  the  chemical  union  of  the  oxygen  with 
some  of  the  other  elements  and  certain  products  result.  Among 
the  products  of  chief  importance  to  the  body  are  heat  and  energy. 
Waste  products  such  as  carbon  dioxide,  various  forms  of  acid,  and 
other  wastes  are  produced,  which   are  excreted  from  the  body. 

8.  The  digestive  tract  is  composed  of  the  mouth,  stomach,  and  in- 
testines. In  the  mouth  the  food  is  masticated  or  ground  up,  moist- 
ened for  swallowing,  and  the  change  of  its  starch  into  sugar  is  begun 
by  the  saliva.  In  the  stomach  the  food  is  till  further  mixed  or  churned 
by  the  muscular  action  of  the  stomach.  By  this  action  the  food  is 
mixed  with  the  gastric  juice.  This  juice  contains  two  enzymes,  pep- 
sin and  rennin.  The  pepsin  transforms  the  proteids  of  the  foods  to 
soluble  form  called  peptone.  The  rennin  acts  npon  the  proteids  found 
in  milk,  after  which  this  proteid  is  digested  as  other  proteids  are. 
Probably  some  mineral  salts  are  dissolved  by  the  hydrochloric  acid 
of  the  stomach,  which  also  destroys  some  disease  germs  and  fer- 
ments. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  95 

There  is  some  preparatory  action  for  digestion  upon  food  stuffs 
in  the  stomach  besides  the  digestion  of  the  proteids.  Fats  are  li- 
quefied by  the  heat  of  the  stomach.  Froteids  cover  of  starch,  fats, 
etc.,  are  removed  by  the  proteid  digestion  and  starch  and  fats  are 
thus  freed  for  digestion.  The  mixture  of  all  these  digested  and  un- 
digested particles  results  in  milky  fluid  called  chyme. 

The  chyme  enters  the  intestine  where  the  last  stages  of  diges- 
tion are  carried  on.  The  small  intestine  receives  thru  one  duct 
the  secretions  of  the  liver  and  pancreas  called  the  bile  and  the  pan- 
creatic juice.    It  also  secretes  by  its  own  glands  the  intestinal  juices. 

The  bile  acts  upon  fats  by  saponifying  them.  It  also  tends  to 
prevent  the  putrefaction  of  foods  in  the  intestine,  and  separates  the 
proteids  into  such  forms  that  they  may  be  acted  upon  by  the  pan- 
creatic juice. 

The  pancreatic  juice  completes  the  transforming  of  the  proteids 
to  peptone,  the  remaining  starches  not  acted  upon  by  the  mouth  di- 
gestion are  converted  into  sugar  and  prepared  for  absorption. 

The  intestinal  juice  converts  what  remains  of  the  starch  to 
sugar  and  also  converts  all  sugar  into  grape  sugar. 

9.  The  liver  is  located  just  beneath  the  diaphram  on  the  right  side. 
on  a  line  with  the  stomach  and  partly  overlapping  it.  The  liver 
stores  digested  sugar  and  starch  in  the  form  of  glycogen;  it  destroys 
poisons  brought  to  it  by  the  blood  and  secretes  the  bile.  The  action 
t>f  the  bile  is  given  in  8. 

The  kidneys  are  located  one  on  each  side  of  the  backbone  just 
below  the  lower  ribs.  The  kidneys  receive  the  waste  laden  blood 
from  the  body  and  remove  much  of  the  waste-urea  from  it.  The 
urea  mixed  with  water,  is  excreted  from  the  body,  while  the  waste 
freed  blood,  returns  to  the  circulation. 

The  perspiratory  glands  are  located  under  skin  in  all  parts  of  the 
body.  They  collect  from  the  blood  nitrogenous  wastes,  some  salts 
and  water,  and  excrete  them  upon  the  surface  of  the  body. 

Sebaceous  glands  are  scattered  thruout  the  body  in  the  dermis. 
They  secrete  oil  and  discharge  it  upon  the  hair  and  skin. 

The  lachrymal  glands  are  situated  on  the  outer  and  upper  orbit 
of  the  eye.  They  secrete  a  salty  liquid  called  the  tear  or  the  lachry- 
mal fluid. 

The  parotid,  sublingual,  and  submaxillary  glands — see  3.  Spleen- 
see  2. 

10.  The  best  method  of  ventilating  a  school  room  is  to  have  a  con- 
stant supply  of  fresh  air  forced  into  the  room  after  having  been 
brought  to  the  proper  temperature.  There  should  be  a  ventilating 
shaft  connection  with  an  opening  near  the  floor.  In  most  schools 
this  method  is  not  provided.  When  no  method  whatever  is  provided, 
one  window  on  the  side  of  the  building  from  which  the  wind  is  not 
blowing,  should  be  lowered  from  the  top  and  another  raised  from  the 
bottom.  If  this  makes  it  too  cold  for  pupils  or  is  found  impractical, 
the  lower  sashes  of  the  windows  should  be  raised  six  inches  and  the 
space  thus  made  filled  with  a  board  sawed  to  fit.  This  allows  of 
some  ventilation  between  the  sashes. 


96  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

In  the  ordinary  stove  heated  room  the  stove  should  be  "jacketed." 
There  should  be  a  pipe  provided  to  bring  in  to  the  jacket  a  supply 
of  fresh  air  from  outside  and  a  ventilating  register  near  the  floor 
should  be  provided  for  the  extraction  of  the  vitiated  air.  This 
method  can  be  used  in  any  stove  heated  room. 

11.  Bone  is  composed  of  animal  matter,  cartilage  or  gristle,  and 
mineral  matter,  chiefly  lime.  If  a  large  bone  is  examined  we  find  it  to 
be  covered  with  a  tough  cartilaginous  coat  called  the  periosteum,  a 
layer  of  hard  bone,  one  of  soft  or  spongy  bone,  usually  a  hollow 
space  filled  with  a  fatty  substance  called  marrow. 

When  examined  more  closely  it  is  found  that  the  bones  are 
pierced  by  canals,  called  the  Haversian  Canals.  Thru  these  open- 
ings the  blood  vessels  of  the  periosteum  penetrate  to  all  parts  of  the 
bone.  These  main  canals  are  connected  by  smaller  ones  called  cana- 
liculi.  These  small  canals  are  at  right  angles  to  the  larger  ones, 
and  connect  them  with  a  series  of  cavities  called  lacunae.  The 
lacunae  contain  the  living  bone  cells.  These  bone  cells  secrete  from 
the  material  brought  to  them  by  the  blood  the  bone  materials.  The 
lime  part  of  the  secretion  forms  in  concentric  rings  about  the  lacunae 
and  these  layers  are  called  lamellae. 

In  general,  bones  are  to  give  shape  to  the  body,  to  produce  motion 
when  acted  upon  by  the  muscles,  and  to  protect  the  more  vital 
parts  of  the  body. 

The  flat  bones  are  used  generally  for  protection  as  in  the  case 
of  the  ribs,  the  shoulder  blades  and  the  bones  of  the  skull,  while  the 
larger  bones  of  the  limbs  are  used  to  give  motion  to  the  body. 

12.  The  spinal  cord  is  about  seventeen  inches  long,  about  three- 
quarters  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  is  composed  of  both  gray  and 
white  matter,  the  white  being  on  the  outside.  It  has  three  membranes 
for  an  outer  covering,  dura  mater,  the  arachnoid,  and  the  pia  mater. 

While  the  cord  is  nearly  cylindrical  in  shapet  it  is  somewhat 
flattened  from  front  to  back  and  has  two  fissures,' the  anterior  one 
being  wide  and  shallow  and  the  posterior  one  being  narrow  and  deep. 
The  white  matter  of  the  cord  is  on  the  outside  and  consists  of  nerve 
fibres  running  lengthwise  of  the  cord.  Within  the  cord  is  a  darker 
substance  called  the  gray  matter,  which  is  composed  chiefly  of 
nerve  cells,  tho  some  fibers  are  present.  This  gray  matter  is  ar- 
ranged in  the  form  of  a  letter  H  or  forms  a  body  of  somewhat  butter- 
fly shape.  The  cord  gives  off  at  regular  intervals  nerve  roots  which 
unite  a  short  distance  from  the  cord  to  form  pairs  of  nerves  on  the 
opposite  sides  of  the  cord.  There  are  in  all  thirty-one  pairs  of  these 
nerves. 

The  spinal  cord  has  two  functions.  It  receives  impulses  from 
different  parts  of  the  body.  Some  of  the  impulses  are  received  by  a 
nerve  cell  in  the  cord,  and  a  motor  impulse  is  sent  out  and  action 
ensues  in  some  part  of  the  body,  without  the  action  of  the  brain. 
This  is  reflex  action.  The  spinal  cord  also  transmits  nerve  impulses 
from  all  parts  of  the  body  to  the  brain,  and  motor  nerve  impulses 
from  the  brain  to  all  parts  of  the  body. 

13.  We  are  surrounded  by  a  substance  which  fills  all  space,  called 
ether.     By  some  disturbing  body  vibrations  are  set  up  in  the  ether. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  97 

Some  of  these  vibrations  enter  the  eye  and  fall  upon  the  retina  which 
Is  an  expansion  of  the  optic  nerve  located  at  the  back  of  the  eye-ball. 
This  irritates  the  optic  nerve  which  carries  the  impulses  so  received 
to  the  brain  and  "we  see."  The  vibrations  from  the  external  ether 
enter  the  eye  thru  a  small  opening  in  front.  This  opening  is  the 
black  part  of  the  eye,  and  is  called  the  pupil.  Surrounding  the  pupil 
is  the  colored  part  of  the  eye — the  blue  or  the  brown,  etc.,  called 
the  iris;  back  of  the  pupil  is  the  crystalline  lens,  which  divides  the 
eye-ball  into  two  chambers  or  cavities.  The  one  of  these  in  front 
of  the  lens  is  filled  with  a  watery  fluid  called  the  aqueous  humor  and 
behind  the  lens  is  a  much  larger  chamber  filled  with  a  semi-liquid 
substance  called  vitreous  humor.  The  general  shape  of  the  eye- 
ball is  given  by  the  cartilaginous  outer  coat  called  the  sclerotic  coat. 
Within  this  is  a  very  thin  black  membranous  coat  called  the  choroid. 
The  sclerotic  coat  forms  the  outside  of  the  eye-ball  and  gives  it 
shape.  It  has  a  curious  opening  in  front  which  is  covered  by  a  tough 
transparent  membrane  called  the  cornea.  The  optic  nerve  enters 
the  back  of  the  eye  and  spreads  out  there  forming  on  the  inside 
of  the  eye-ball  a  sensitive  coat  called  the  retina. 

14.  1.  Take  plenty  of  exercise  in  the  open  air  every  day.  Walking 
or  some  form  of  athletic  games  is  excellent  for  this. 

2.  Take  plenty  of  sleep,  seven  or  eight  hours  each  day,  in  a 
well  ventilated  room. 

3.  Chew  the  food  thoroly.  Eat  slowly.  Eat  only  simple 
nutritious  food  and  only  amid  pleasant  surroundings. 

4.  Keep  personally  clean.  Bathe  daily.  Drink  plenty  of  water, 
and  take  time  to  properly  care  for  the  body. 

5.  Obey  the  laws  of  public  health.  Be  careful  to  keep  articles 
of  food  clean.  Be  scrupulous  in  observing  quarantine  and  all  other 
public  health  regulations.  Keep  the  mind  in  a  healthy  state  by  think- 
ing kindly,  healthy,  optimistic  thoughts. 


PENMANSHIP. — Answers. 

By  Charles  Mcintosh,  Superintendent  of  Piatt  County  Schools. 

1.  Requires  applicant's  own    writing-. 

2.  (1)  mnx  (2)  iuwve  (3)  lbhkf  (4)  aoc  (5)   tqpq 
(6)   jgyz(7)sr  (See  page  66  State  Course.) 

The  height  of  the  one  space  small  letters  should  be  one-sixteenth 
of  an  inch  (See  page  65  State  Course.) 

3.  FARMERS   STATE   BANK   OF   MONTICELLO 

Monticello,  Illinois,  January  16,  1915 

Pay  to  the  order  of E.   B.  LEWIS $100.00 

One  Hundered Dollars 

and  charge  to  the  account  of 

Chicago  National  Bank  J.  W.  AYRE 

Chicago  Illinois  Cashier. 

Pay  to  the  order  of 

E.  F.  Dunne 

E.  B.  Lewis 

E.  F.  Dunne 


98  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  tfOOK. 

4.  There  are  a  number  of  exercises  that  may  be  used  to  develop 
the  muscles  used  in  writing,  as  follows:  (1)  Opening  and  closing 
the  hand,  (2)  shaking  the  hand  from  the  wrist,  (3)  using  the  pusn 
and  pull  exercise  arm  resting  on  muscles  of  the  fore-arm  hand  not 
touching  the  desk,  (4)  same  exercise  fingers  turned  under  and  nails 
gliding  on  paper,  (5j  same  exercise  with  open  hand,  (6)  same  exer- 
cise with  clenched  hand,  (7)  push  and  pull  and  oval  exercises  on 
board,  (8)  making  form  of  letters  in  air,  etc. 

To  teach  uniform  motion,  have  the  various  exercises  given  above 
performed  to  music,  or  while  counting. 

Calisthenic  exercises  in  rhythm  also  help  to  teach  uniform  mo- 
tion. Proper  muscular  development  and  control  are  very  necessary 
to  good  penmanship,  as  is  also  the  habit  of  uniform  motion  in  mak- 
ing the  letters. 

5.  The  teacher  should  exercise  the  greatest  scrutiny  possible 
over  all  the  writing  of  her  pupils,  especially  those  pupils  in  the  pri- 
mary and  intermediate  grades  where  the  habits  are  being  formed. 
Correct  position  in  writing,  uniform  movement  and  good  form  are 
largely  matters  of  habit.  Unless  the  suggestions  made  in  the  writing 
period  are  followed  in  doing  the  written  work  required  in  other  sub- 
jects, there  can  be  but  little  improvement  in  penmanship.  In  many 
schools  too  much  written  work  is  done  in  the  primary  and  interme- 
diate grades.  From  the  standpoint  of  penmanship,  at  least,  it  would 
be  better  if  less  were  done  more  carefully  and  painstakingly.  If  the 
teacher  could  insist  that  the  small  amount  of  written  work  required 
be  well  and  carefully  done,  improvement  in  writing  would  be  sure  to 
follow. 

6.  Correct  position  means  the  correct  manner  of  sitting  in  writ- 
ing. This  means  body  erect,  feet  flat  on  floor,  desk  of  proper  height, 
arm  on  desk,  etc. 

Movement  refers  to  the  kind  of  movement  used  in  the  writing, 
whole  arm,  finger,  muscular.  The  State  Course  suggests  the  mus- 
cular movement  from  the  very  beginning. 

Rhythm  means  a  uniform  rate  of  movement  in  writing. 

In  order  to  establish  these  things  in  the  first  and  second  grades, 
the  pupils  should  be  asked  to  assume  the  correct  position  before  be- 
ginning to  write  and  when  they  get  out  of  position  should  be  brought 
back  in  the  proper  one  by  the  word  "position"  pronounced  by  the 
teacher. 

To  establish  the  muscular  movement,  the  Course  suggests  that 
when  exercises  are  practiced  on  the  board,  they  be  written  immedi- 
ately at  the  seat  to  avoid  the  habit  of  the  whole  arm  movement.  It 
means  that  all  the  pupils'  writing  should  be  done  with  the  muscu- 
lar movement,  and  that  the  pupil  be  never  allowed  to  drift  into  the 
finger  movement. 

Rhythm  is  established  thru  calisthenic  exercises,  muscular  exer- 
cises, various  writing  drills  to  music,  or  counting  in  the  absence  of 
music. 

7.  The  pupil  must  first  feel  that  it  is  important  that  he  improve 
his  writing.  His  attention  should  be  called  to  the  importance  of  leg-, 
ible  writing  in  all  written  work.  What  is  written  down  is  written 
in  order  that  it  may  be  read  by  some  one  else,  or  read  by  the  same 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  99 

individual  at  some  future  time.  Neither  of  these  results  can  follow 
unless  the  writing  is  legible. 

Call  the  attention  of  the  pupil  to  the  fact  that  it  is  a  pleasure 
to  read  a  neat,  carefully  written  letter  or  paper  where  the  letters 
are  correctly  formed,  and  that  it  is  anything  but  a  pleasure  to  read  a 
slovenly  written  composition  that  is  scarecely  legible. 

Pupils  should  be  encouraged  to  pass  judgment  on  their  own  pen- 
manship to  compare  the  various  lines  written  in  the  writing  period 
each  day  to  determine  which  specimen  is  best.  They  should  be  en- 
couraged to  tell  why  that  specimen  is  better  than  any  of  the  others. 
It  Is  a  good  plan  to  get  a  sample  of  the  pupil's  best  writing  at  least 
once  each  month,  and  compare  the  sample  written  any  one  month 
with  the  samples  written  in  previous  months  and  to  note  the  im- 
provement, if  any,  that  he  is  making. 

When  a  class  has  prepared  a  written  exercise,  it  is  well  occasion- 
ally, to  hold  the  various  ones  before  the  class,  and  let  the  class  pass 
judgment  as  to  which  is  best.  Post  the  best  written  paper  en  the 
board  for  several  days. 


GRAMMAR— Answers. 

By  Miss  Laura  Hayes,  Teacher  of  English  Grammar,  Illinois  State 
Normal  University. 
1.  (a)  An  expletive  is  according  to  the  derivation  of  the  word  a 
"filler  in."  It  is  a  word  which  has  no  use  in  the  sentence  except  to 
change  the  form.  It  is  called  by  some  grammarians  a  form  word. 
There  is  a  God. 

(b)  An  appositive  is  a  substantive  added  to  another  substantive 
without  the  aid  of  a  connecting  word.  It  may  classify,  identify  or 
merely  repeat.     Mary,  my  sister,  is  here. 

(c)  A  gerund  is  a  verbal  noun  ending  in  "ing."  Finishing  the 
work  required  skill. 

(d)  An  auxiliary  verb  is  a  verb  which  helps  in  the  formation 
of  the  tenses  of  other  verbs.  In  the  sentence,  I  have  a  pencil,  the 
word  have  expresses  the  idea  of  possession  and  is  not  an  auxiliary 
verb,  but  in  the  sentence,  /  have  found  a  pencil,  the  idea  of  action  ia 
asserted  of  the  subject  of  thought.  The  word  have  is  therefore  only 
an  auxiliary  verb. 

(This  term  is  not  used  by  many  grammarians.) 

(e)  A  collective  noun  is  a  common  noun  which  even  in  its  sin- 
gular form  represents  more  than  one  individual  or  thing  of  the  same 
kind.    Example.    I  saw  a  flock. 

2.  Inflection  is  a  slight  change  in  the  form  of  a  word  to  denote 
a  difference  in  meaning  or  a  difference  in  construction.  Nouns,  pro- 
nouns, verbs,  adjectives  and  adverbs  are  inflected.  Words  are  in- 
flected in  the  following  ways: 

(a)  By  a  eh-auge  in  the  words  as  take,  took;   woman,  women. 

(b)  By  adding  a  letter  or  a  syllable  as  walk,  walks;  boy,  boy's, 
boys;  box,  boxes.  Sometimes  the  last  letter  must  be  changed  or 
omitted.  Sometimes  it  must  be  doubled  as  baby,  babies;  write,  writ- 
ing; omit,-  omitted. 


100  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

(c)  By  the  use  of  helping  words  as  walks,  have  walked;  beautiful, 
.more  beautiful. 

(d)  By  the  use  of  different  words  as  I,  my  or  mine  me;  good, 
better,  best. 

3.  (a)  I  have  what  you  are  looking  for.  The  word  what  is  a 
relative  pronoun. 

(b)  What  weather  we  are  having.  The  word  what  is  an  adjec- 
tive. 

(c)  What  partial  judges  these  are.     The  word  what  is  an  adverb. 
(This    use    is    not    sanctioned    by    some    grammarians,    tho    mod- 
ern dictionaries  are  beginning  to  use  it.     I  do  not  approve  of  it.) 

(d)  What  are  you  looking  for?  The  word  what  is  an  interroga- 
tive pronoun. 

(e)  What!     You  don't  mean  it.     The  word  what  is  an  interjection. 

4  (a)  Whither  thou  goest  I  will  go.  The  adverbial  clause 
whither  thou  goest  is  added  to  the  word  go  by  means  of  the  conjunc- 
tive adverb  whither.     It  expresses  place. 

(b)  This  is  the  story  that  we  read.  The  adjective  clause  that 
we  read  is  added  to  the  word  story  by  means  of  the  conjunctive  pro- 
noun that.    The  clause  is  limiting. 

(c)  The  ground  is  wet  because  it  has  rained.  The  adverbial 
clause  because  it  has  rained  is  added  to  the  word  ivet  by  means  of 
the  subordinate  conjunction  because.     The  clause  expresses  cause. 

(d)  It  was  so  cold  that  the  mercury  froze.  The  adverbial  clause 
that  the  mercury  froze  is  added  to  the  word  so  by  means  of  the 
subordinate  conjunction  that.     The  clause  expresses  degree. 

(e)  This  we  know,  that  our  future  depends  on  our  present.  The 
noun  clause  that  our  future  depends  on  our  present  is  in  apposition  to 
the  word  this. 

5  (a)  The  word  we  is  a  personal  pronoun.  It  is  of  the  first 
person,  plural  number,  either  masculine  or  feminine  gender,  nomina- 
tive case.     It  is  the  subject  of  the  clause. 

Its  declension  is: 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.:     I.  We. 

Poss. :     My,    mine.  Our,  ours. 

Obj. :     Me.  Us. 

(b)  The  word  ground  is  a  common  noun.  It  is  of  the  third  per- 
son, singular  number,  neuter  gender,  nominative  case.  It  is  the  sub- 
ject of  the  sentence. 

Its  declension  is: 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.:     Ground.  Grounds. 

Poss. :     Ground's.  Grounds.' 

Obj.:      Ground.  Ground. 

(c)  The  word  wet  is  an  adjective  showing  the  condition  of  the 
ground.  It  is  used  as  the  predicate  attribute  of  the  sentence.  It  is 
compared. 

Positive;    Wot. 

Comparative:     Wetter.  •  -    -     •      •       -- 

Superlative:     Wettest. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  101 

(d)  The  words  has  rained  are  an  attributive  intransitive  verb 
phrase.  It  is  made  up  of  the  verb  7ms  and  the  past  participle  rained. 
The  verb  rain  is  a  new  conjugation  verb  whose  principal  parts  are 
rain,  rained,  rained. 

The  phrase  is  in  the  active  voice,  indicative  mode,  present  perfect 
tense.  It  is  in  the  third  person  and  singular  number  to  agree  with 
its  subject  it. 

(e)  The  word  so  is  an  adverb  expressing  the  degree  of  the  cold- 
ness.   It  is  added  to  the  word  cold.    It  is  not  compared. 

(f)  The  word  this  is  an  adjective  pronoun.  It  is  of  the  third 
person,  neuter  gender,  singular  number,  objective  case.  It  is  the 
object  of  the  sentence. 

It  has  only  the  plural  form  these. 

6.  (a)   She  invited  Kate  and  me.    The  word  me  must  be  used  because 
it  is  the  object  of  the  word  invited. 

(b)  Whom  did  you  speak  to?  The  word  whom  must  be  used 
because  it  is  the  object  of  the  preposition  to: 

(c)  She  has  come  from  a  distant  city.  The  word  come  must  be 
used  because  the  verbal  in  a  present  perfect  tense  is  a  past  participle. 

(d)  It  must  have  been  he  that  I  met.  The  word  he  is  used  be- 
cause it  is  the  predicate  attribute. 

(e)  She  has  come  from  a  distant  city.  The  word  come  must  be 
used  because  it  is  an  adverb  showing  the  manner  of  the  speaking. 

(f)  Whom  did  you  call?  The  word  whom  must  be  used  because 
it  is  the  object  of  the  verb  phrase  did  call. 

(g)  The  color  of  the  roses  is  red.  The  word  is  must  be  used  be- 
cause it  must  agree  with  its  subject  color. 

(h)  He  has  laid  the  book  on  the  table.  The  word  laid  must  be 
used  because  it  is  the  past  participle  of  the  transitive  verb  lay. 

(i)  Each  of  the  boys  has  an  apple.  The  word  has  must  be  used 
to  agree  with  its  subject  each.  The  word  each  is  always  singular  In 
number. 

(j)  Did  you  give  Mary  or  me  the  message?  The  word  mc  must 
be  used  because  it  is  the  indirect  object. 

7.  Ten  uses  of  the  noun  with  illustrations  are: 

1.  Subject  of  a  sentence  or  clause.  The  man  is  here.  I  know 
the  man  whom  Mr.  Smith  saw. 

2.  Object  of  a  sentence  or  clause.  I  saw  a  man.  I  know  the  man 
who  saw  Mr.  Smith. 

3.  Predicate  attribute  of  a  sentence  or  clause.  The  man  is  Mr 
Smith.    The  man,  who  is  my  friend,  spoke  to  me. 

4.  Predicate  attribute  of  the  object.     They  elected  him  treasurer. 

5.  Object  of  a  verbal.     The  girl  sweeping  the  room  is  neat. 

6.  Appositive.     Mary,  my  friend,  visited  me. 

7.  Adverbial  substantive.     He  ran  a  mile. 

8.  Indirect  object.     Give  John  the  book. 

9.  Object  of  a  preposition.     He  goes  to  school. 

10.  Nominative  of  address.     Mary,   sit  still. 

8.  (a)  A  relative  pronoun  is  a  pronoun  which  joins  an  adjective 
clause  jto  a  noun,  or  pronoun.  It  must  have  the  use  of  a  pronoun  in  the 
clause- and  it  must  b'e  used*  as- a'  conjunction. •      ••    .     . 


102  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION   BOOK. 

A  personal  pronoun  is  a  pronoun  which  shows  by  its  form,  even 
when  standing  alone,  whether  it  represents  the  speaker,  the  one 
spoken  to,  or  the  one  spoken  of. 

(b)  A  clause  must  have  a  subject  and  a  predicate  and  is  used 
like  a  noun,  adjective  or  adverb.  A  phrase  may  not  have  a  subject 
or  a  predicate  and  may  be  used  like  any  part  of  speech. 

9.  (a)  A  noun  clause  used  as  the  subject  of  a  sentence  is  illustrated 
in  the  following  sentence:     That  the  earth  is  round  has  been  proved. 

(b)  A  noun  clause  used  as  the  object  complement  is  illustrated 
in  the  following  sentence:     I  know  that  the  earth  is  round. 

(c)  A  noun  clause  used  as  the  attribute  complement  is  illustrated 
in  the  following  sentence:     Her  reply  was,  "I  will  go." 

(d)  A  sentence  with  an  adjective  clause  connected  by  the  word 
where  is  illustrated  in  the  following  sentence:  I  went  to  Bloomington 
where  I  bought  a  dress.  The  word  where  is  really  two  parts  of  speech. 
As  a  conjunction  it  joins  the  clause  to  the  word  Bloomington,  and 
as  an  adverb  it  is  added  to  the  word  bought. 

10.  (a)  The  word  there  is  no  part  of  speech.     It  is  an  expletive  or 
form  word  used  to  change  the  form  of  the  sentence. 

(b)  The  word  youth  is  a  noun  used  as  the  subject  of  the  sentence. 

(c)  The  word  years  is  a  noun  used  as  an  adverb  added  to  the 
adverb  ago.     It  is  an  adverbial  substantive. 

(d)  The  word  satv  is  an  infinitive  used  as  the  object  of  the  prep- 
osition to.    The  prepositional  phrase  is  added  to  the  word  worth. 

(This  construction  is  historically  correct,  and  is  used  by  many 
grammarians.  There  are  some  who  would  doubt  it,  and  these  would 
call  the  word  saw  an  infinitive  used  as  an  adverb.) 

(e)  The  word  who  is  a  conjunctive  (relative)  pronoun.  As  a 
conjunction  it  joins  the  clause  who  had  pure  taste  by  right  divine  to 
the  words  King  Admetus.  As  a  pronoun  it  is  the  subject  of  the 
clause. 

(f)  The  word  taste  is  a  noun  used  as  the  object  of  the  clause. 

(g)  The  word  right  is  a  noun  used  as  the  object  of  the  preposi- 
tion by.    The  prepositional  phrase  is  added  to  the  word  had. 

(h)  The  word  divine  is  an  adjective  added  to  the  word  right. 

(i)  The  word  decreed  is  a  verb  used  as  the  predicate  of  the 
sentence, 

(j)  The  word  singing  is  a  gerund  used  as  the  object  of  the  verb 
decreed. 

(k)  The  word  too  is  an  adverb  of  degree  added  to  the  adjective 
bad. 

(1)  The  word  cups  is  a  noun  used  as  the  object  of  the  preposi- 
tion between.     The  prepositional  phrase  is  added  to  the  word  hear. 

(m)  The  word  pleased  is  a  participle  added  to  the  word  he. 

(n)   The  word  icell  is  an  adverb  added  to  the  word  pleased. 

(o)  The  words  being  soothed  are  a  verbal  phrase  used  as  the  ob- 
ject of  the  preposition  with.  The  word  being  is  a  gerund  and  the 
word  soothed  is  a  past  participle.  The  prepositional  phrase  is  added 
to  the  word  pleased. 

(p)  The  word  sleep  is  a  noun  used  as  the  object  of  the  pFeposi« 
tion  into.    The  prepositional  phrase  is  adde4  to  tfce  word.sootft'ed,     .. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  103 

(q)   The  word  heard  is  a  noun  used  as  the  object  of  the  word 
smoothed.  

(r)  The  word  and  is  a  co-ordinate  conjunction  joining  the  two 
predicates  of  the  sentence. 

(s)  The  word  him  is  a  pronoun  used  as  the  object  of  the  sen- 
tence. 

(t)  The  word  viceroy  is  a  noun  used  as  the  predicate  attribute  of 
the  object  and  a  part  of  the  predicate  attribute.  It  shows  the  effect 
of  the  making  viceroy  upon  him. 

11.  Sentences  illustrating  four  uses  of  the  infinitive  are  as  follows: 

1.  To  be  here  is  good.  The  infinitive  is  used  as  the  subject  of 
the  sentence. 

2.  To  see  is  to  believe.  The  infinitive  is  used  as  the  predicate 
attribute  of  the  sentence. 

3.  You  ought  to  study.    The  infinitive  is  used  as  the  object  of  tne 

sentence 

4.  She  does  nothing  except  study.  The  infinitive  Is  used  as  the 
object  of  the  preposition  except. 

12.  The  verb  phrases  which  are  underlined  in  the  following  sentences 
illustrate  those  which  are  asked  for  in  this  question. 

(a)  They  have  been  praised  a  number  of  times. 

(b)  Praise  him.  (The  word  praise  is  only  a  verb,  not  a  verb 
phrase.  A  verb  phrase  cannot  be  used  unless  we  use  the  emphatic 
or  the  progressive  form.)  .         . 

(c)  If  we  praised  him,  he  would  like  it.  (The  word  praised  is, 
however,  not  a  verb  phrase.) 

(d)  You  might  have  been  praised.  (The  best  authorities  do  not 
use  the  potential  mode.     I  do  not.) 

(e)  He  will  praise  him. 

13  Sex  refers  to  the  object  itself,  gender  to  the  word  which  represents 
the  object.  A  man  is  of  the  male  sex,  but  the  word  man  is  masculine 
gender. 

Gender  may  be  shown  in  three  ways: 

1.  By  a  change  of  the  word  itself  as  boy,  girl;   son.  daughter. 

2.  By  inflection  of  the   word   as  prince,   princess;    host,   hostess. 

3.  By  reference  to  some  other  word  as  Mr.  Smith  is  my  teacher. 
The  word  teacher,  which  may  be  either  gender,  is  here  masculine,  be- 
cause it  refers  to  the  male  Mr.  Smith. 

One  summer  morning,  when  the  sun  was  hot, 

Weary  with  labor  in  his  garden  plot; 

On  a  rude  bench  beneath  the  cottage  eaves, 

Sir  Federigo  sat  among  the  leaves  of  a  huge  vine. 
This  is  a  complex  declarative  sentence.     The  main  proposition  is 
one  summer  morning,  weary  with  labor  in  his  garden  plot.    On  a  rude 
tench  beneath  the  eaves.  Sir  Federigo  sat  among  the  leaves  of  a  huge 
vine. 

The  subject  is  the  words  Sir  Federigo.  The  copula  and  predicate 
combined  (predicate)  is  the  word  sat.  The  word  weary  is  an  adjec- 
tive added  to  the  word  Sir  Federigo.  The  phrase  with  his  labor  is 
an  adverbial  prepositional  phrase  added  to  the  word  weary.  The  word 
labor  is  the  principal  term  in  the  phrase  and  it  has  as  an  adjunct  the 


104  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

possessive  modifier  his.  The  phrase  in  his  garden  plot  shows  the 
place  of  the  labor  and  is  added  to  the  word  labor.  It  is  an  adjective 
prepositional  phrase.  The  word  plot  is  the  principal  term  of  the 
phrase  and  it  has  as  adjuncts  the  possessive  modifier  his  and  the 
noun  garden,  which  is  used  as  an  adjective. 

The  word  morning  is  a  noun  used  as  an  adverb.  It  shows  the 
time  when  the  assertion  is  true  and  is  added  to  the  word  sat.  The 
word  one  is  an  adjective  added  to  the  word  morning.  The  word  sum- 
mer is  a  noun  used  as  an  adjective  added  to  the  word  morning.  The 
clause  ivhen  the  sun  was  hot  is  an  adjective  clause  telling  something 
about  the  morning  and  is  added  to  the  word  morning  by  means  of 
the  conjunctive  adverb  when  Which  is  added  to  the  word  was  in  its 
clause.  The  word  sun  is  the  subject  of  the  clause.  The  word  was  is 
the  copula.  The  word  hot  is  the  predicate  attribute  of  condition. 
The  word  the  is  an  adjective  added  to  the  word  sun. 

The  phrase  on  a  rude  bench  shows  upon  what  he  sat  and  is  added 
to  the  word  sat.  It  is  an  adverbial  prepositional  phrase.  The  word 
bench  is  the  principal  term  of  the  phrase  and  it  has  as  adjuncts  the 
adjectives  a  and  rude.  The  phrase  beneath  the  eaves  shows  the  place 
of  the  bench  and  is  added  to  the  word  bench.  It  is  an  adjective  prep- 
ositional phrase.  The  word  eaves  is  the  principal  term  of  the  phrase 
and  it  has  as  an  adjunct  the  adjective  the.  The  phrase  among  the 
leaves  shows  the  place  of  sitting  and  it  is  added  to  the  word  sat.  It 
is  an  adverbial  prepositional  phrase.  The  word  leaves  is  the  principal 
term  of  the  phrase  and  it  has  as  an  adjunct  the  adjective  the.  The 
phrase  of  a  huge  vine  shows  what  leaves  (or  the  whole  of  which  a  part 
is  taken)  and  is  added  to  the  word  leaves.  It  is  an  adjective  preposi 
tional  phrase.  The  word  vine  is  the  principal  term  of  the  phrase  and 
it  has  as  adjuncts  the  adjectives  a  and  huge. 


GEOGRAPHY— Answers. 


By  Superintendent  Edgar  S.  Jones,  Taylorville,   III. 

1.  Maps  are  representations  of  certain  geographical  truths,  hence 
a  making  or  a  reading  of  them  gives  the  ideas  in  a  most  graphic  man- 
ner. 

The  school  room,  yard  or  nearby  lot  or  field  may  be  drawn  to  a 
scale  of  so  many  feet  to  an  inch  or  a  fraction  of  an  inch.  Prom 
these  local  areas  the  work  may  continue  until  the  state  or  continent 
is  reached  when  the  scale  consists  of  so  many  miles  to  an  inch  or  is 
merely  a  proportionate  scale.  One  of  the  main  reasons  is  the  cen- 
tering of  the  railroads  around  the  south  end  of  Lake  Michigan  as 
well  as  the  water  line  of  transportation  by  the  way  of  the  Great 
Takes.  Another  factor  is  tho  unusually  fertile  soil  to  the  south  and 
west.  Still  another ,  reason  is  the  nearby  coal  fields  and  the  iron  of 
the  Lake  -Superior?  •  regions*-  -    -  - 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  105 

3.  North    America.  Mississippi.  Gulf  of  Mexico. 

St.  Lawrence.  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. 

South   America.  Amazon.  Atlantic    Ocean. 

La  Plata.  Atlantic    Ocean. 

Africa.                   Nile.  Mediterranean    Sea. 

Congo.  Atlantic    Ocean. 

Europe.                  Danube.  Black  Sea. 

Rhine.  North  Sea. 

Asia.                      Yang   tse  Kiang.           Yellow  Sea.           

Ganges.  Bay  of  Bengal. 

4.  After  the  sketch  is  made  draw  eight  horizontal  lines  over  the 
middle  Mississippi  Valley  thus  showing  the  medium  rainfall;  the 
scant  rainfall  of  the  southwest  may  be  represented  by  vertical  lines 
while  the  northwestern  and  southeastern  parts  of  the  United  States 
may  be  represented  by  oblique  lines  or  heavy  dots. 

5.  When  the  air  is  considerably  heated  as  it  is  in  the  equatorial 
region,  it  rises.  As  the  heated  air  Is  pushed  up  it  moves  toward  the 
north  and  south  in  the  direction  of  areas  which  are  not  as  highly 
heated,  finally  reaching  the  surface.  Owing  to  the  rotation  of  the 
earth  the  surface  currents  flow  from  a  greater  pressure  to  a  Iowct 
pressure.  The  trade  winds  blow  from  the  northeast  and  from  the 
southeast. 

6.  Climate  is  the  basis  of  location  if  it  is  taken  into  considera- 
tion that  climate  is  determined  by  latitude. 

The  purpose  of  latitude  and  longitude  is  to  determine  the  exact 
location  of  a  place  with  reference  to  the  equator  and  a  chosen 
meridian. 

Latitude  is  the  distance  north  or  south  from  the  equator,  being 
measured  on  meridians,  while  longitude  is  the  distance  east  or  west 
from  a  selected  meridian.     Longitude  is  measured  on  parallels. 

7.  The  trade  winds  bring  from  the  ocean  a  large  amount  of 
moisture,  hence  we  find  in  the  Guianas  and  northern  Brazil  an  ex- 
cessive rainfall.  In  south  Brazil  is  to  be  found  the  zone  of  calms. 
This  produces  practically  a  desert  as  is  found  in  Bolivia  and  in  the 
Desert  of  Atacama.  The  westerly  zone  in  which  is  located  central 
and  southern  Chili  has  a  dry  belt. 

8.  With  the  development  of  agriculture  and  especially  the  rais- 
ing of  wheat,  corn,  cattle  and  sheep,  Argentina  is  competing  with  the 
United   States  for  the   markets  of  Europe. 

9.  The  annual  rise  of  the  Nile  is  attributed  to  the  fact  that  the 
source  of  the  river  is  in  the  belt  of  calms.  The  rise  of  the  river 
begins  about  June  1st  and  reaches  its  highest  point  in  October 
when  it  recedes  until  the  following  June.  Part  of  the  source,  how- 
ever, in  the  winter  is  in  the  path  of  the  trade  winds. 

In  winter  the  monsoons  blow  from  the  land  to  sea  thus  causing 
the  dry  seasons.  In  summer  the  monsoons  blow  toward  the  land 
from  the  ocean  thus  bringing  an  excess  of  vapor. 

The  trade  winds  have  been,  blowing  a  long  distance  over  the 
land/ -hence   they   have   but   little   vapor -for   the   Sahara    re^ons. 


106  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

Another  reason  is  that  the  winds  are  blowing  from  a  cooler  to  a 
warmer  region  and  are  taking  up  moisture  rather  than  losing  it. 
10.    The  British  Isles  extend  from  50  degrees  to  60  degrees  north 

latitude. 

The  climate  of  the  British  Isles  is  more  even  than  that  of  the 
continent  of  Europe,  being  influenced  by  the  Gulf  Stream  and  the 
westerly  winds.  The  western  coast  receives  the  greater  rainfall  and 
it  is  also  a  noticeable  fact  that  the  range  of  temperature  between 
summer  and  winter  in  Ireland  is  seldom  more  than  25  degrees. 

The  British  Isles  correspond  to  Labrador  and  British  Columbia 
in  North  America.  Labrador  is  especially  influenced  by  the  polar 
currents.  British  Columbia's  temperature  is  reduced  by  the  warm 
winds   from  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

France  is  about  four  times  as  large  as  Illinois  while  Germany 
compares  favorably  with  the  combined  areas  of  Iowa,  Missouri,  Illi- 
nois and  Indiana. 

France  is  bounded  on  the  north  by  the  English  Channel,  on  the 
east  by  Belgium,  Germany,  Switzerland  and  Italy,  on  the  south  by 
the  Mediterranean  Sea  and  Spain,  on  the  west  by  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

Germany  is  bounded  in  the  same  order  as  follows:  North  Sea. 
Denmark  and  Baltic  Sea,  on  the  east  by  Russia  and  Austria,  on  the 
south  by  Austria  and  Switzerland,  on  the  west  by  France,  Belgium 
and  Netherlands. 


Rivers. 

Products. 

Silk. 

Seine. 

Wheat. 

France. 

Rhone. 

Grapes. 

Garonne. 

Live  stock. 
Sugar  beets. 

Rhine. 

Potatoes. 

Germany. 

Elbe. 

Rye. 

Vistula. 

Live  stock. 
Manufactured  products. 

On  March  20th  the  sun  shines  vertically  on  the  Equator,  the  circle 
of  illumination  extending  from  pole  to  pole.  The  days  and  nights 
are  everywhere  of  equal  length.  On  June  22d  the  vertical  rays  of 
the  sun  extend  to  the  Tropic  of  Cancer  and  the  circle  of  illumination 
extends  23%  degrees  beyond  the  north  pole  and  lacks  23%  degrees 
of  reaching  the  south  pole.  On  account  of  the  inclination  of  the 
earth  to  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic  the  length  of  day  increases  until 
June  22d,  when  the  greatest  length  is  attained.  On  September  20th 
the  day  and  night  are  again  equal  for  the  reason  that  the  direct  rays 
of  the  sun  are  shining  on  the  Equator. 

If  the  earth's  axis  were  inclined  30  degrees,  the  width"  of  each 
Frigid  Zone  would  be  30  degrees.  Twice  the  width  of  the  Frigid  Zone 
would  be  the  width  of  the  Torrid.  This  would  be  60  degrees.  One 
hundred  and  eighty  degrees— 60  degrees  the  ToVritf  and  60  degrees" 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  ROOK.  107 

both.  Frigids  equals  60.  One-half  of  60  degrees  equal  30  for  each  tem- 
perate zone. 

Wheat  production — Northern  Mississippi  Valley,  Nile  Valley, 
France,  Valley  of  the  Danube. 

Cotton — Southern  United  States,  India,  Nile  Valley. 

Manufacturing — England,  Germany,  United   States,   Prance. 

The  fact  that  no  single  country  produces  all  the  various  needed 
products  makes  transportation  between  the  countries  necessary. 

Great  Britain,  Germany,  United  States,  Netherlands,  France, 
Russia,  Japan  and  Brazil. 


UNITED  STATES  HISTORY— Answers. 

By    A.    F.    Strome,    Department    of    History,    Western    Illinois    State 

Normal  School. 

1.  (aO  Oglethorpe's  purpose  in  obtaining  a  grant  of  land  and 
making  a  settlement  in  America  was  to  provide  a  place  of  refuge  and 
new  opportunity  for  the  debtor  class  of  England. 

(b)  Cortez  was  a  Spanish  soldier  sent  by  the  Governor  of  Cuba 
to  conquer  and  plunder  the  rich  Indian  kingdom  of  Mexico. 

(c)  Ponce  de  Leon  at  different  times  had  different  objects  in 
view,  as  discovery,  exploration,  settlement  and  conquest.  His  chief 
motive  in  the  exploration  of  Florida  was  the  desire  to  discover  the 
fountain  of  youth. 

(d)  Balboa  was  a  Spanish  adventurer  and  bankrupt.  His  chief 
motive  was  the  desire  for  easily  acquired  wealth.  It  was  while  on 
an  outlaw  expedition  in  search  of  wealth  that  he  discovered  the 
Pacific. 

(e)  The  Pilgrims  came  to  America  because  of  the  desire  for  re- 
ligious freedom.  They  had  at  first  found  refuge  in  Holland  but  fear- 
ing that  they  would  soon  lose  their  character  and  identity  in  the 
midst  of  the  foreign  population  they  decided  to  come  to  America 
where  they  could  govern  themselves  and  worship  as  they  chose,  and 
bring  up  their  children  without  fear  of  the  corrupting  influences  of  a 
foreign   life. 

2.  (a)  The  earliest  English  settlement  in  the  United  States  was 
that  of  the  so-called  "Lost  Colony"  made  in  1587,  on  Roanoke  Island. 
The  first  permanent  settlement  was  that  of  Jamestown,  made  in  1607. 

(b)  It  is  not  possible  to  say  when  and  where  the  first  Spanish 
settlement  within  the  United  States  was  made.  The  first  permanent 
settlement  was  that  of  St.  Augustine  made  in  1565. 

(c)  The  first  French  settlement  was  that  made  by  Ribault  at 
Port  Royal  on  the  Carolina  coast  in  1562. 

(d)  The  first  Dutch  settlements  were  made  at  what  are  now 
Albany  and  New  York  in  1613  and  1614. 

3.  (a)  One  of  the  most  important  events  in  the  early  history  of 
Virginia  was  the  convening  of  the  House  of  Burgesses  in  1619. 

(b)  An  important  event  in  connection  with  the  early  days  of 
Maryland  was  the  passage  of  the  Toleration  Act  in  1649. 


108  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

(c)  An  event  of  great  significance  In  connection  with  the  settle- 
ment of  Massachusetts  was  the  transfer  of  the  Company's  Charter  to 
America  in  1629. 

(d)  Doubtless  the  most  important  single  event  in  the  early  his- 
tory of  New  York  was  the  establishment  of  the  Dutch  West  India 
Company  in  1621. 

(e)  The  most  important  event  in  connection  with  the  settlement 
of  Georgia  was  the  introduction  of  slavery  in  1749. 

4.  Among  the  more  important  physical  conditions  favoring  the 
growth  of  civilization  are: 

(a)  A  temperate  climate.  It  is  only  the  people  of  a  temperate 
climate  who  have  the  energy,  the  resources,  and  the  leisure  necessary 
to  the  development  of  a  high  degree  of  civilization. 

(b)  A  moderate  and  well  distributed  rainfall.  Neither  excessive 
rainfall  nor  excessive  dryness  is  conducive  to  the  development  of  a 
varied  agriculture,  and  agriculture  is  civilization's  basic  industry. 

(c)  Natural  resources.  A  favorable  distribution  of  fertile  soil, 
minerals,  water  power,  etc.,  stimulates  a  varied  production  and  the 
consequent  specialization  which  is  essential  to  a  high  degree  of  civ- 
ilization. 

(d)  Accessibility.  Second  only  to  production  is  distribution,  and 
easy  distribution  is  possible  only  where  the  country  is  readily  acces- 
sible. 

5.  In  the  course  of  our  national  development  the  following  ad- 
ditions have  been  made  to  the  original  territory  of  the  United  States: 

(a)  Louisiana,  by  purchase  from  France  in   1803. 

(b)  West  Florida  to  the  Perdido  River  seized  by  the  order  of 
President  Madison  in  1810. 

(c)  Remainder  of  West  Florida  seized  in  1812. 

(d)  Florida,  including  the  territory  previously  seized,  purchased 
from  Spain  in  1819.     (Treaty  ratified  in  1821.) 

(e)  Texas  by  annexation  in  1845. 

(f)  Oregon  territory  south  of  parallel  49  degrees  assured  to  the 
United  States  by  a  treaty  with  England  in  1846. 

(g)  California  and  New  Mexico  territory  by  conquest  and  ces- 
sion from  Mexico  in  1848. 

(h)  The  Gadsden   Purchase,   1853. 

(i)  Alaska  by  purchase  from  Russia  in  1867. 

(j)  Hawaii  by  annexation  in  1898. 

(k)  Porto  Rico,  Guam,  and  the  Philippines  by  cession  from  Spain, 
1898. 

(1)  Island  of  Tutuila  by  joint  agreement  between  the  United 
States,  Germany  and  England  in  1900. 

6.  The  doctrine  of  secession  was  as  old  as  the  national  govern- 
ment. It  had  been  advanced  at  various  times  by  states  or  sections 
which  felt  aggrieved  at  the  action  of  the  national  government.  The 
South  had  long  maintained  the  doctrine  as  a  defense  against  what  it 
termed  the  tyranny  of  the  majority.  When  the  Republican  party 
was  formed  the  Southern  leaders  believing  or  professing  to  believe 
that  if  this  party  got  control  of  the  government  their  liberties  and 
institutions  would  be  in  danger,  prepared  to  carry  their  threat  into 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QTTESTION  BOOK.  1Q9 

effect.  In  1860  Lincoln  was  elected,  and  South  Carolina  immediately 
passed  an  ordinance  of  secession.  She  was  followed  by  the  remainder 
of  the  southern  states. 

Among  the  more  prominent  leaders  in  this  movement  were  Jef- 
ferson Davis,  Howell  Ccbb,  Robert  Toombs,  and  Juda  P.  Benjamin. 
7.     The  chief  terms  of  the  compromise  measure  of  1850  were: 

(a)  That  California  should  be  admitted   as  a  free   state. 

(b)  That  the  slave  trade  should  be  abolished  from  the  District 
of  Columbia. 

(c)  That  a  new  and  more  stringent  fugitive  slave  law  should  be 
passed. 

(d)  That  New  Mexico  and  Utah  territories  should  be  organized 
without  any  provision  relative  to  slavery. 

(e)  That  the  boundaries  of  Texas  should  be  fixed  and  that  she 
should  be  paid  a  sum  of  money  for  the  relinquishment  of  her  claims 
on  New  Mexico,  and  the  release  of  the  United  States  from  all  obliga- 
tion to  pay  the  Texan  debt. 

The  principle  of  Popular  Sovereignity  as  set  forth  in  the  com- 
promise measure  was  practically  nullified  later  by  the  decision  of 
the  Supreme  Court  in  the  Dred  Scott  case.  It  was  also  claimed  by 
the  South  that  the  Fugitive  Slave  Law  was  violated  by  the  North 
in  the  passage  of  the  Personal  Liberty  Bills. 

8.  (a)  The  franchise  in  Massachusetts  was  limited  by  law  to 
church  members,  and  by  practice  to  the  propertied  classes.  Only 
about  one-fourth  of  the  adult  males  enjoyed  the  right  of  suffrage  at 
any  time  during  the  seventeenth  century. 

The  suffrage  laws  of  Virginia  were  on  the  whole  more  liberal 
than  those  of  Massachusetts.  At  first  all  white  males  seem  to  have 
voted.  In  1670  the  right  was  limited  to  freeholders,  A  freeholder 
was  defined  by  an  Act  of  1736  as  meaning  the  owner  of  one  hundred 
acres  of  wild  land,  or  fifty  acres  of  improved  land,  or  of  a  house  and 
lot  in  town.  Shortly  before  the  Revolution  these  qualifications  were 
reduced  one-half. 

(b)  The  Puritans  of  Massachusetts  believed  that  education  was 
one  of  the  chief  means  of  fighting  the  devil.  Especially  were  they 
anxious  that  their  children  should  be  able  to  read  the  Scriptures. 
One  of  their  first  concerns  therefore  was  the  establishment  of  the 
public  school  system.  In  1636  it  was  voted  to  found  a  college,  and 
In  1647  the  general  court  passed  an  Act  for  the  establishment  of  a 
common  school  in  every  town  of  fifty  families,  and  a  grammar  school 
in  each  of  the  larger  towns. 

Virginia  was  more  backward  in  the  cause  of  education.  Here, 
owing  to  the  aristocratic  character  of  Virginia  society  and  the  fact 
that  the  population  was  scattered,  a  system  of  public  schools  was 
not  established.  However,  several  free  schools  of  a  private  character 
were  founded,  and  the  children  of  the  wealthier  planters  were  in- 
structed by  private  tutors.  Higher  education  was  fostered  by  the 
establishment  of  William  and  Mary  College  in  1691. 

(c)  The  social  life  of  Virginia  and  Massachusetts  differed  widely. 
That  of  Massachusetts  was  centered  about  the  church  and  was  char- 
acterized by  frugality  and   Puritan   severity,  while  that  of  Virginia 


110  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

centered  in  the  great  plantation  and  was  marked  by  all  the  luxury 
and  freedom  characteristic  of  the  life  of  the  upper  classes  in  Eng- 
land. 

9.  (a)  Alexander  Hamilton's  greatest  public  service  was  the 
formulation  and  carrying  into  effect  of  his  financial  plans,  thus 
strengthening  the  new  government  and  establishing  its  credit. 

(b)  Benjamin  Franklin's  greatest  service  was  his  work  as  rep- 
resentative to  France  during  the  American  revolution.  It  was  chiefly 
due  to  his  influence  that  France  entered  into  alliance  with  the 
Colonies. 

(c)  Patrick  Henry's  greatest  service  to  his  country  was  doubt- 
less his  speeches  setting  forth  the  theory  of  colonial  rights. 

(d)  Thomas  Jefferson's  greatest  service  was  the  purchase  of 
Louisiana. 

(e)  Eli  Whitney's  great  contribution  to  his  country  was  the  in- 
vention of  the  cotton  gin. 

10.  In  a  general  way  it  may  be  said  that  the  war  of  1812  was 
caused  by  England's  outrageous  violations  of  our  neutral  rights.  For 
many  years,  indeed,  ever  since  the  outbreak  of  Napoleonic  wars,  we 
had  been  the  victims  of  the  efforts  of  England  and  France  to  injure 
each  other,  and  the  injury  due  to  this  cause  was  aggravated  by  Eng- 
land's known  desire  to  crush  the  American  carrying  trade.  It  is 
scarcely  a  fair  statement,  however,  to  say  that  the  war  was  waged 
solely  in  defense  of  "Sailors'  Rights."  It  was  due  largely  to  the 
rising  tide  of  American  national  life,  and  that  life  found  its  most 
vigorous  expression  in  the  new  west.  The  men  who  wanted  war,  the 
"War  Hawks,"  were  for  the  most  part  young  men  from  the  west, 
men  whose  spirit  rebelled  against  any  further  submission  to  the 
abuses  to  which  their  country  was  subject. 

The  war  was  fought  under  the  administration  of  James  Madison. 

The  Spanish  American  War  was  the  outgrowth  of  Spain's  mis- 
government  in  Cuba.  Not  only  did  Americans  have  large  interests 
in  Cuba,  but  the  American  people  were  naturally  sympathetic  for  the 
Cubans  who  were  in  rebellion  against  the  oppression  of  the  Spanish 
government.  Finally,  after  the  Maine  was  blown  up,  public  opinion 
became  irresistible  in  its  demands  and  the  government  was  com- 
pelled to  declare  war  in  behalf  of  the  Cubans. 

This  occurred  during  the  administration  of  President  McKinley. 

11.  The  reasons  for  teaching  history  may  be  summed  up  in  the 
statement  that  good  citizenship  demands  that  history  be  taught. 

(a)  A  good  citizen  is  one  who  understands  our  present  day  life 
and  institutions,  and  our  life  and  institutions  can  be  understood  only 
in  the  light  of  their  development. 

(b)  The  good  citizen  is  patriotic,  and  history  teaches  patriotism 
by  teaching  the  meaning  of  our  country. 

(c)  The  good  citizen  is  moral,  and  history  teaches  morality  by 
showing  the  consequences  flowing  from  wrong  action  and  the  rewards 
of  right  actions. 

(d)  The  best  citizen  is  the  cultured  citizen,  and  one  of  the  ele- 
ments of  culture  is  an  intelligent  knowledge  of  the  past. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK.  Ill 

History  teaching  in  the  intermediate  grades  should  be  confined 
to  a  few  topics  inherently  interesting  to  children,  and  these  should 
be  treated  with  fullness  of  detail.  It  is  a  mistake  to  attempt  anything 
like  a  general  survey  in  these  grades.  The  effort  to  do  this  entails 
condensation  of  statement  and  children  cannot  visualize  condensed 
statements. 

12.  Since  the  time  of  the  adoption  of  the  constitution  the  people 
of  the  United  States  have  been  in  a  general  way,  divided  into  two 
great  parties  with  respect  to  the  powers  and  functions  of  the  national 
government.  One  party  has  favored  the  interpreting  of  the  consti- 
tution broadly,  permitting  the  national  government  to  exercise  very 
large  powers  under  authority  of  the  so-called  elastic  clause,  which 
authorizes  congress  to  make  all  laws  which  shall  be  necessary  to 
carry  the  specially  enumerated  powers  into  effect.  The  other  party 
has  held  to  a  strict  interpretation  of  the  constitution  maintaining 
that  the  national  government  should  exercise  only  such  powers  as 
were  expressly  conferred  on  it.  The  first  great  political  parties  were 
formed  upon  this  issue.  Hamilton  and  the  Federalists  advocated  the 
doctrine  of  broad  construction  while  Jefferson  and  the  Democratic 
Republicans  advocated  strict  construction.  At  the  present  time  the 
<ssue  is  not  so  sharply  defined,  but  the  Republican  party  in  general 
stands  for  large  national  powers  while  the  Democratic  party  empha- 
sizes state  rights  and  limitation  of  federal  powers. 

13.  In  the  period  immediately  preceding  the  discovery  of 
America,  Europe  was  undergoing  a  great  change.  The  old  mediaeval 
system  was  breaking  up.  Feudalism  was  disappearing,  the  towns 
were  rapidly  growing  under  the  influence  of  a  revived  commerce, 
luxury  was  increasing,  and  even  the  modes  of  thought  were  changing, 
own  sake,  and  consequently  gave  more  attention  to  the  things  of  this 
world.  The  result  was  a  great  revival  of  learning  and  new  develop- 
People  were  beginning  to  realize  that  life  was  worth  living  for  its 
ments  in  the  way  of  discoveries  and  inventions.  Political  conditions 
were  also  changing.  As  the  Feudal  system  declined,  the  national 
governments  arose  into  power  and  influence  and  began  to  play  a  part 
in  the  new  life.  In  religion  alone  was  there  marked  evidence  of  de. 
cline.  The  great  church  organization  was  corrupt  and  the  people  were 
losing  confidence  not  only  in  the  clergy,  but  even  in  the  doctrines  of 
the  church.  However,  the  influences  of  change,  were  exerting  them- 
selves in  the  field  of  religion,  and  the  way  was  being  prepared  for  the 
great  religious  revival  which  began  only  a  few  years  after  the  dis- 
covery of  America. 

14.  The  constitutional  convention  was  called  to  meet  at  Phil- 
adelphia in  May  of  1787.  The  delegates  who  attended  were  the  best 
men  of  the  country,  men  who  were  fully  conscious  of  the  perils  which 
beset  the  nation.  But  from  the  first  it  was  apparent  that  there  were 
almost  irreconcilable  differences  of  opinion  as  to  the  proper  remedy 
for  the  existing  evils.  The  representatives  from  the  large  states  were 
generally  in  favor  of  the  formation  of  a  strong  national  government, 
while  the  small  state  group  fearful  that  the  small  states  would  be 
overshadowed  by  the  large  states  strove  to  preserve  the  confederation 
idea.    The  two  parties  were  frequently  in  deadlock,  and  failure  some- 


112  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

times  seemed  inevitable.  The  main  point  at  issue  between  the  two 
parties  was  the  question  of  representation  in  congress.  The  small 
states  demanded  equal  representation,  while  the  large  states  de- 
manded that  representation  be  based  on  population  or  wealth.  After 
a  bitter  struggle  the  question  was  settled  by  yielding  to  the.  small 
states  equal  representation  in  the  Senate,  while  representation  In 
the  House  of  Representatives  was  to  be  on  the  basis  of  the  large  state 
idea  of  representation  according  to  population.  This  settled  the  great 
question  of  issue  between  the  large  and  small  states,  but  after  this, 
other  questions  of  a  sectional  character  came  up.  The  second  great 
controversy  grew  out  of  the  first.  When  it  was  decided  to  base  rep- 
resentation in  the  lower  house  on  population,  the  question  arose  as 
to  whether  slaves  were  to  be  counted  as  population  or  wealth.  The 
same  point  came  up  in  connection  with  the  question  of  direct  taxation, 
it  having  been  decided  to  apportion  direct  taxes  according  to  repre- 
sentation. The  slave  holding  states  naturally  wished  to  count  slaves 
as  population  in  determining  representation,  and  as  wealth  in  appor- 
tioning direct  taxes.  The  northern  states  wished  to  count  them  as 
wealth  in  apportioning  representation,  and  as  population  in  appor- 
tioning taxes.  The  question  was  settled  by  counting  three-fifths  in 
both  cases. 

The  third  great  struggle  came  up  in  regard  to  the  regulation  of 
commerce.  New  England  desired  that  congress  be  given  full  power 
to  regulate  both  foreign  and  interstate  commerce.  The  southern 
states  fearing  an  export  tax  on  farm  products  and  a  prohibition  of 
the  slave  trade  opposed  New  England.  The  question  was  settled  by 
giving  congress  full  power  to  regulate  commerce,  with  the  exception 
that  no  duties  on  exports  were  to  be  levied  and  that  the  slave  trade 
should  not  be  prohibited  before  the  year  1808.  With  these  difficult 
questions  out  of  the  way  the  convention  completed  its  work  and  ad- 
journed on  September  17th. 


ILLINOIS    HISTORY— Answers. 

By  Elbert  Waller.  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Albion,  III.,  and  Author 
of  Wallers  History  of  Illinois. 

1.  The  first  people  in  Illinois  were,  without  much  doubt,  the 
Mound  Builaers.  They  were  succeeded  by  the  Indians,  all  of  whom, 
except  the  Shawnees,  belonged  to  the  Algonquins.  Among  the  tribes 
may  be  mentioned  the  Kaskaskias,  the  Kahokias,  the  Peorias,  the 
Tamaroas  and  the  Mitchigamies,  all  of  whom  belonged  to  the  Illinois 
Federation.  To  these  we  would  add  the  Miami  Federation,  composed 
of  the  Miamis,  the  Eel-Rivers,  the  Weas  and  the  Piankeshaws. 

2.  When  Illinois  was  admitted  to  the  Union  the  boundary  was 
so  changed  as  to  add  a  strip  fifty  miles  wide  across  the  north  end. 
This  gave  us  a  lake  front  which  made  vast  shipping  interests  pos- 
sible, giving  us  the  site  for  the  City  of  Chicago.  It  also  gave  us  a 
large  population  in  the  state  that  favored  the  Union  in  the  time  of 
the  Civil  War,  and  did  much  toward  holding  Illinois  as  a  loyal  state. 

3.  Spain,  France  and  England.  Louis  Joliet,  then  Robert 
Cavalier  de  La  Salle. 


ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION   BOOK.  113 

4.  At  twelve  o'clock  noon  on  Wednesday  next  after  the  first 
Mondav  in  January  of  odd-numbered  years.  Fifty-one  in  the  Senate 
and  one  hundred  and  fifty-three  in  the  House  of  Representatives. 

5.  Kaskaskia,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Kaskaskia  River,  Vandalia  on 
the  Kaskaskia  River,  about  a  hundred  miles  from  the  mouth,  Spring- 
field on  the  Sangamon  River. 

6.  Massacre  of  Fort  Dearborn  in  1812,  Capital  of  Illinois  from 
1820  to  1839.    Scene  of  trouble  with  the  Mormons. 

7.  A  code  of  laws  for  the  government  of  the  northwest  territory. 
Applied  to  early  government  of  Illinois,  defined  its  boundary,  set 
conditions  on  which  it  might  become  a  state,  prohibited  slavery. 

8  In  1778  he  floated  down  the  Ohio  and  landed  near  Fort  Massac, 
crossed  over  and  took  Kaskaskia  from  the  English  and  hoisted  the 
Stars  and  Stripes,  thence  across  the  country  and  took  the  British 
post  at  Vincennes,  and  thus  amid  untold  dangers  and  hardships, 
established  the  authority  of  Virginia  over  this  region.  The  U.  S. 
Government  later  voted  him  a  sword,  but  as  he  said,  he  needed  mone^. 
He  died  in  poverty  in  1818. 

9.  In  1673,  Joliet,  an  explorer,  and  Father  Marquette,  a  mission- 
ary crossed  the  present  State  of  Wisconsin  to  the  Mississippi  River, 
sailed  down  to  the  mouth  of  the  Illinois  River,  thence  up  to  its 
source,  thence  across  the  portage  to  Lake  Michigan  and  to  the  point 
of  starting.  Marquette  returned  to  the  Illinois  country  and  there 
died.  LaSalle  was  also  a  French  explorer,  who  with  Henry  Tonti, 
an  Italian  soldier,  founded  Fort  Creve  Cour  on  Lake  Peoria.  LaSalle 
left  Tonti  there  and  explored  the  country  to  the  mouth  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi River,  then  returned  and  built  a  fort  on  Starved  Rock. 
Tonti  staved  at  the  fort  and  LaSalle  went  to  France  for  supplies  and 
men  and  tried  to  return  by  way  of  the  mouth  of  the  Mississippi  River, 
but  was  assassinated  by  one  of  his  own  men.  Tonti  tried  to  protect 
Fort  Creve  Cour  against  the  Iroquois,  but  was  forced  to  give  it  up 
and  it  was  destroyed.  After  varying  hardships  and  misfortunes,  he 
went  to  the  mouth  of  the  Mississippi  River  to  search  for  LaSalle,  but 
never  found  him.  After  learning  of  LaSalle's  death  he  returned  to 
the  French  settlement  at  Green  Bay. 

10.  Beginning  at  the  mouth  of  the  Wabash  River,  thence  up  the 
same  and  with  the  line  of  Indiana,  to  the  northwest  corner  of  said 
state,  thence  east  with  the  line  of  said  state  to  the  middle  of  Lake 
Michigan,  thence  north  along  the  middle  of  said  lake  to  north  latitude 
42°  30  minutes,  thence  west  to  the  middle  of  the  Mississippi  River, 
thence  down  the  middle  of  said  river  to  its  confluence  with  the  Ohio 
River,  thence  up  that  river  along  the  northwestern  shore  to  the  point 
of  beginniing.    388  miles  long,  190  miles  wide,  area  56,000  square  miles. 

11.  Its  natural  resources  in  the  way  of  minerals  and  fertile 
lands,  its  navigable  rivers,  its  climate,  its  location  in  the  parkway  of 
commercial  routes,  its  proximity  to  the  older  states  and  its  people 

12     E.  K.  Kane.  Sidney  Brees,  Lyman  Trumball,  James  Shields, 
David    Davis,   Stephen    A-    Douglas,    Abraham    Lincoln    and    John    A. 
Logan  as  statesmen;   Abraham  Lincoln  and  U.  £.  Gran<   as  pre^idents;^ 
U.  S.  Grant,  John  '&  Logan,  Richard  J.      jlesl 
generals. 


114  ILLINOIS  STATE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

13.  Old  Fort  Dearborn,  erected  in  1804,  is  the  original  site  of 
Chicago.  In  1812  the  Indians  attacked  them  and  a  large  number  of 
the  people  were  massacred.  In  1836  the  last  of  the  Pottawatomiea 
left  Chicago  and  the  next  year  it  was  incorporated  as  a  city.  The 
Chicago  fire  occurred  in  1871.  It  covered  2,200  acres,  caused  the  death 
of  over  300  people  and  the  destruction  of  $200,000,000  worth  of  property. 
It  has  now  a  population  of  nearly  3,000,000  people.  The  state  peniten- 
tiaries are  at  Joliet  and  at  Chester. 

14.  Some  came  from  the  New  England  states  by  way  of  the 
Great  Lakes  and  settled  in  the  northern  part.  People  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, Ohio  and  Indiana  settled  principally  in  the  central  part.  People 
from  Virginia  and  Maryland,  coming  down  the  Ohio,  and  those  from 
Kentucky,  Tennessee,  the  Carolinas  and  Georgia  settled  principally 
in  the  southern  part.  Those  who  settled  in  the  northern  part  mainly 
opposed  slavery,  as  well  as  did  most  of  the  people  of  the  central  part, 
but  those  who  settled  in  southern  Illinois  quite  generally  favored  it 


LIBRARY  OF  CONGRESS    f* 


0  019  741  191  0